Skip to main content

Decks & Patios

Black & Decker The Complete Guide to Patios & Walkways - Money-Saving Do-It-Yourself Projects for Improving Outdoor Living Space

Source: Black & Decker The Complete Guide to Patios & Walkways - Money-Saving Do-It-Yourself Projects for Improving Outdoor Living Space.pdf

Source file: Black & Decker The Complete Guide to Patios & Walkways - Money-Saving Do-It-Yourself Projects for Improving Outdoor Living Space.pdf

Money-saving Do-it-yourself Projects for Improving Outdoor Living Space

              (j
         o.tive PUbls"ing
           inlD urian.

      MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA
         www.crea tivep u b.co m

 (j

0’flIIIIw Publllililg iil”li r ..

copyright © 2010, 2011 President/CEO: Ken Fund Creative Publishing international, Inc. VP for Sales & Marketing: Kevin Hamric 400 First Avenue North, Suite 300 Minneapolis, Minnesota 55401 Home Improvement Group 1-800-328-0590 www.creativepub.com Publisher: Bryan Trandem All rights reserved Managing Editor: Tracy Stanley Senior Editor: Mark Johanson Printed in at R.R. Donnelley Editor: Jennifer Gehlhar

10987654321 Creative Director: Michele Lanci-Altomare Art Direction/Design: Jon Simpson, Brad Springer, James Kegley Digital edition: 978-1-61673-333-9 Lead Photographer: Joel Schnell Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Set Builder: James Parmeter Production Managers: Linda Halls, Laura Hokkanen The complete guide to patios & walkways: money-saving do-it-yourself projects for improving outdoor living space. Page Layout Artists: Hespenheide Design p. cm . Shop Help: Charles Boldt Includes index. Author: Philip Schmidt At heaf of title: Black and Decker. Copy Editor: Betsey Matheson Summary: “A comprehensive guide to plan, build, maintain, repair, Proofreader’ Jane Hilken and accessorize great outdoor living spaces”—Provided Illustrator: Trevor Burks by publisher. ISBN-13: 978-1-58923-481-9 (soft cover) Cover Photo by Beth Singer © 2009 ISBN-10: 1-58923-481-2 (soft cover)

  1. Patios—Amateurs’ manuals. 2. Garden walks—Amateurs’ manuals. I. Black & Decker Corporation (Towson, Md.) II. Title.

TH4970.C6472010 690’ .893—dc22

2009038316

The Complete Guide to Patios & walkways Created by: The Editors of Creative Publishing international, Inc. in cooperation with Black & Decker. Black & Decker® is a trademark of The Black & Decker Corporation and is used under license.

NOTICE TO READERS For safety, use caution, care, and good judgment when following the procedures described in this book. The Publisher and Black & Decker cannot assume responsibility for any damage to property or injury to persons as a result of misuse of the information provided . The techniques shown in this book are general techniques for various applications. In some instances, additional techniques not shown in this book may be required. Always follow manufacturers’ instructions included with products, since deviating from the directions may void warranties. The projects in this book vary widely as to skill levels required: some may not be appropriate for all do-it-yourselfers, and some may require professional help. Consult your local Building Department for information on building permits, codes and other laws as they apply to your project.

Contents The Complete Guide to Patios & Walkways

Introduction . … . … 5

PATIO & WALKWAY BASICS . … . … .. .. 7 Design Themes for Patios … … … … … . . 8 Material Selection … … … … … . 16 Practical Considerations … … .... ........... 26 Patio & Walkway Plans … … … … … … . 32

PATIO PROJECTS . … 39 Layout & Surface Preparation . … . … … … .. 40 Drainage Swales … … … … … 46 Dry Wells … … … … 49 Retaining Walls … … … … … . 51 Cobblestone Paver Patio … … … … ..... . 57 Circular Paver Patio … … … … . 64 Mortared Paver Patio .. … .. … . … . … … 70 Sandset Flagstone Patio … .. … … … … .. ... 75 Mortared Flagstone Patio … … … . . 84 Concrete Slab Patio … … … … … . . 89 Acid-Stained Concrete Patio . … … … … … . 96 Seeded Concrete & Wood Patio … … … . … 100 Tiled Concrete Slab … … … … … … 106 Loose Materials Patio .. … .. … … … … … 114 Loose-fill Patio with Fire Pit … … … … … … .... . 116 Wood Tile Patio … . … … … … … . 120 RubberTile Patio … … … … .......... 122 Patio Edging . … . … … … … … 124 Sandset Brick Patio … … … … .......... 132

WALKWAYS & STEPS … 139 Designing & Laying Out walkways & Steps . … … 140 Sandset Brick walkway … .. … . … … … . ..... 144 Poured Concrete Wal kway … … … … 150 Decorative Concrete Path … … … 156 Mortared Brick Over a Concrete Path … … … .... 160 Flagstone Walkway … … … … … … . 164 Simple Gravel Path … . … .. … . … … … 167 Pebbled Stepping Stone Path . … … … … … … . 173 Timber Garden Steps … … … … … 177 Flagstone Garden Steps … … … … … 187 Boardwalk … … … … … … … . 192

PATIO ROOMS & AMENITIES . … 195 Under-Deck Patio … .. … … ........... 196 Patio Enclosure … … … … … … ... 206 Patio Arbor & Trellis … … … … .... 220 Screened Patio Room … … … … ..... 228 Outdoor Kitchen … … … … … … 236 Low-voltage Patio & Landscape Lighting … … 244

Resources . … 250 Photography Credits . … 251 Index … . … 253

I

Introduction A well-apPointed patio is the perfect example of enhanced outdoor living space. Designed around your lifestyle and favorite leisure activities, a patio can be comfortable, spacious, and even versatile, just like any well- used indoor gathering place. But what makes a patio so special are the things you can’t get under your roof: pure sunlight, open air, an atmosphere that changes hourly and with the seasons- in short, a direct connection to the outdoors. It is this unique combination of comfort and the natural world that gives patios the power to lure us out of the house and away from our indoor routines. As an “outdoor room,” designing and decorating a new patio is not so different from planning any other living space. The design rule “function comes first” certainly applies. Assessing how everyone in the household will use the new patio is the primary consideration that influences every other decision, from planning the size, shape, and layout to choosing paving materials and adding special features and amenities. One of the great things about building a new patio or walkway is the number of options you have to choose from. Few other building projects offer so many choices of materials, configurations, and even locations-unlike a deck or balcony, a patio doesn’t have to be tied to the house or confined to the back yard; it can welcome guests at the front door or host an intimate gathering around a fire pit in a far corner of your lot. With all of this flexibility, a patio can complement your home’s architecture as much as it shapes your landscape, and that’s what makes creating a patio from scratch such a rewarding project. If a patio is a stage from which you can enjoy the outdoors, walkways and paths are the ties that bring it all together, linking the house, patio, garden, lawn, driveway, and any other points in between. Pathways unify various landscape elements in both functional and perceptual ways: they define spaces, direct traffic, and make it easy to travel from one place to the next. They also draw a line between separate, sometimes distant, spaces- joining them visually and inviting us to venture on to the next destination. Thinking about patios and walkways together is a smart choice, as both can transform an outdoor home. It’s not surprising, then, that a new patio project often leads to new walkways as well. Whether you’re dreaming of a new patio, a new walkway, or both, this book will take you through the process from start to finish- from gathering ideas and choosing materials to preparing the site and laying the surface. After surfacing, you can set out some furniture and enjoy the fruits of your labor or you can gather more tools and start right in on another project, such as installing landscape lights or building an outdoor kitchen. Either way, as soon as you begin to enjoy your new patio, you’ll quickly understand why so many do-it-yourselfers see their patios as works in progress- it’s fun to keep thinking up new and creative ways to make your favorite outdoor spaces even better.

                                                                                                                •    5

Patio & Walkway Basics T o install a new patio or walkway, first get started by working through the basic steps of planning your project. The section in this chapter on design themes can help you think conceptually about the character and emotional quality of your new outdoor room. Consider, also, all of the ways you hope to use the new space and decide how the layout and other design elements will best accommodate those activities. Next comes the choice of paving material. Whether it’s classic clay brick, naturally rough-hewn flagstone, simple and sleek concrete, or any of the other great options you’ll learn about here, the surface material you choose will be the defining feature of your patio or path. In addition to the appearance and performance qualities of the different paving options, make sure to think about the logistics of installation. Flip ahead to the step-by-step projects in this book and review the materials to get an idea of the work involved and to gauge which applications best suit your design, budget, and time frame. Other practical matters to consider- including zoning restrictions and natural conditions on your property, such as drainage and seasonal weather- are addressed in this chapter as well. \t\Then it’s time to pull it all together, you’ll find it helpful to draft a site plan. The patio and walkway plans on pages 33 to 37 offer inspiration and tips for thinking globally about your patio or walkway in the context of your outdoor home.

In this chapter: • Design Themes for Patios • Material Selection • Practical Considerations • Patio & Walkway Plans

                                                      • 7

IDesign Themes for Patios

I f you were planning new living spaces for your indoor home, you would probably start by listing the main uses of each room-cooking meals, throwing parties, decide at the last minute to eat outside without much fuss. Choose lighting that is bright enough for eating comfortably but can easily be lowered for after-dinner relaxing with the family, sitting down for a chat with conversation . Locating the patio just off your indoor the neighbors, etc. Keeping these desired uses in kitchen makes the space convenient enough to be mind, you then decide how each space should look used as a second dining room. On the other hand, and feel. What is the essential character, or theme, of an outdoor kitchen brings the cooking right into the the space? Should it be formal and intimate, or should space, so the cook is never stuck inside during those . . it have an open feel, with casual furnishings setting precIOUS summer evemngs. the tone for each activity? The same thought process Entertaining on a patio involves a special combina- applies to designing a new patio (which is, in essence, tion of indoor comforts and outdoor pleasures, where an outdoor living space). The following discussion of the open atmosphere invites guests to lounge under patio design themes can help get you started. the stars or take a stroll through the garden. A well- designed entertainment space should be roomy yet

I Entertaining & Dining comfortable. Overheads and walls promote a feeling of intimacy, while a wide wal1..rway or broad steps can If a patio is perfect for one thing, it’s alfresco meals. encourage guests to wander off the patio and into the Whether enjoying a meal with the family or throwing yard. Furniture and more permanent features, such as a a casual weekend barbeque or late-night hors d’oeuvre fireplace, bar, or large dining table, can define the room’s party, food just tastes better outdoors. A patio intended layout and set the stage for specific activities. Lighting is for everyday meals should be casual and convenient. critical for setting the mood and should be adjustable for Having a table and chairs set up at all times lets you tailoring your patio space to different settings.

                                                                             A simple dining setup with easy access
                                                                             to the kitchen is ideal for everything from
                                                                             morning coffee to romantic dinners to
                                                                             late-afternoon cocktai ls.

8 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Aside from the obvious focal point created by an outdoor fireplace or other similar large structure, an open patio can be entirely defined by its furniture and can be completely rearranged to suit the occasion.

                                                                                 The shelter of plants and overheads
                                                                                 can be an especially welcome feature for
                                                                                 dining and entertaining areas, blocking the
                                                                                 glare and heat of direct sunlight.

                                                                                                     Patio (7 Walkway Basics •   9

I Private When you want to be outside, but don’t want to feel privacy comes a feeling of enclosure and shelter, exposed or on display, a private patio space is the which may result in a space that is intimate but may answer. Privacy can take many forms and often is as be somewhat limited functionally. If this is not what much a result of perception as physical seclusion. you want for your entire patio, you can always make Adding privacy might mean screening out the views of some parts private while leaving others open. Another neighbors or locating the patio in a distant corner of option is to build a small private retreat away from the lot. A fountain or other water feature can provide the main patio. Whatever the design, a private patio a sense of privacy by drowning out noise and letting should be personal and comfortable, particularly for you dwell in your own thoughts. Along with increased those who will spend the most time there.

Urban patios often rely on tall fences or walls for much needed privacy. Plantings help soften the look of the barriers and prevent a closed-in feeling.

10 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Expansive

This sprawling outdoor room maintains an expansive feel with a visual flow between levels. Accents of boulders and trees that echo the view of distant mountains blend this patio into the natural openness of the land.

The most important idea behind expansive patios borrow views of the natural landscape and create the is openness. Where private spaces are sanctuaries perception of increased space. closed off from the outer world, an expansive patio This basic concept of openness also informs the lay- unfolds into the broader landscape, often blending out and decoration of expansive patios. Designs are most with its surroundings. often very simple, with no walls or large plantings that Wide open patio designs are typically favored on would block views or muddle the balance of the overall lots that are large enough not to need privacy and in lot plan. Unobtrusive pots or shrubs placed to the side yards that offer a great view. However, creating an can help frame the view from the patio, but a large over- expansive feel is not about maximizing the patio’s head might be too oppressive and can detract from the size. In fact, small patios can gain the most from an open feeling. An expansive theme works well for remote expansive theme- leaving patios open allows them to outdoor rooms as well as patios right next to the house.

                                                                                                   Patio (7 Walkway Basics •   11

I Remote Most patios are located right behind the house, but constraints set by the house, the patio can blend there’s no rule saying they have to be. A freestanding into the landscape or become an eye-catching or detached patio can be remote both literally and focal point on its own. Detached patios are often psychologically. A remote space can be private, created to supplement a patio or deck adjoining the tucked behind dense foliage at the end of a path, or house. This arrangement offers even more freedom it can be open and expansive in feel-a comfortable for designing the remote patio, since the primary perch for taking in a view or catching the sunset. outdoor activities can take place on the main patio Making your outdoor room out of the way close to the house, while the remote space is used inspires creativity-being free of the style ostensibly as a private retreat.

A remote patio is ideal for a private retreat. Being away from the house, it can take on a unique architecture to elicit a particular mood. Here, a classical romantic setting allows the homeowners to feel as though they are far away when they are just in the back corner of the yard.

12 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Multipurpose Indoors, people congregate in their multifunctional area, for example, doesn’t mean you can’t include a spaces- namely the kitchen and family room. The same natural garden plot, a decorative water feature, or is true for patios: when the outdoor layout and features a sequestered nook for a private reading space. The cater to multiple activities, the space tends to be used ideal plan is dynamic enough to accommodate your more often. After all, the purpose of a patio is to help household’s range of activities, yet remains unified you enjoy your home’s outdoor space. in design and appearance . A broad view of the patio While a multipurpose patio requires careful (which is most often the view from the house ) should planning, it doesn’t have to be all about practicality. reveal an integrated layout with a natural flow from Centering the layout around a functional dining one area to another.

This multipurpose patio includes a built-in firepit on one side and a cozy spot for a bistro set on the other. The open area in the middle provides access to a screened gazebo for all-season recreation.

                                                                                                         Patio (7 Walkway Basics •   13

I welcoming Not all patios need to be hidden behind the house. the entry patio is a return to the concept of the Often surrounding the front door or main entrance, traditional front porch: a semiprivate space that allows welcoming patios are a warm greeting to visitors and homeowners to enjoy the outdoors while keeping in can be an attractive link between the house and a touch with neighbors. Being in full view, however, does driveway or public sidewalk. place certain stylistic and architectural constraints on The inviting appearance of an entry patio certainly an entry patio. As the foreground to a home’s fa<;ade, adds curb appeal, but its true purpose is the same it’s important that the patio complements the home’s as any standard back yard space . In terms of use, proportions and decorative scheme.

A charming walkway and casual sitting area convey a message of welcome and leisure to visitors of this house, as well as providing the perfect spot for spending warm evenings. The low gate adds a sense of privacy and closure to the patio area.

14 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Sheltering This timber-frame awning shades the patio below and plays a significant architectural role as the ceiling of the outdoor room.

A patio shelter can be anything from a garden trellis from the side or roof of a building to create a semi- covered in flowering vines to a permanent, built-in shaded area linking the building with the outdoor overhead that makes the patio livable in all kinds of landscape. Pergolas work equally well as freestanding weather. Arbors and pergolas are the most popular types structures, with four or more columns supporting large of patio overheads, and both are simple structures that roof beams topped with a series of cross beams or lend themselves easily to personal creative touches. slats. Add a pergola to create an attractive ceiling- or Arbors are at home almost anywhere in the the suggestion of a ceiling-over a large section of landscape, from front entryways to secluded gardens. your patio. Cover your pergola along the top with vines On a patio, an arbor can serve as a dramatic entrance or fabric to gain privacy beneath the view of neighbors’ portal, a framework for climbing plants, or a cozy upper-floor windows. shelter for a corner seating area. The basic design of a Careful placement of the overhead slats on patio wooden arbor includes two or four posts with a simple shelters lets you enjoy sun or shade at specific times of slatted roof. The sides between the posts can be left the day. For example, if the summer sun is too hot at open or covered with trelliswork for supporting plants midday, angle the slats toward the morning sun while or adding privacy. blocking out the hottest rays at midday and into the Pergolas are a step up from arbors in size and afternoon. But remember, any shading on an attached stature but are based on similar post-and-beam patio may limit the amount of natural light that construction. In its traditional form , a pergola extends reaches the house.

                                                                                              Patio (7 Walkway Basics •   15

IMaterial Selection

B rick, stone, and concrete rightly make up most people’s short list of good patio and walkway surfaces, but these materials in their basic forms are just quite versatile and can be easily applied to formal layouts or imaginative curved patterns. The standard brick patio installation consists of setting brick into a the beginning. Brick alone comes in a range of colors, sand bed in an ordered pattern, but brick can also be textures, and styles, while the availability of stone mortared over a concrete patio slab or walkway for a and the variety of concrete pavers are both constantly highly finished appearance and a surface that won’t be expanding. After giving some thought to your preferred affected by ground movement. flooring surface, it will be well worth it to spend a few Bricks for outdoor floor surfaces are called pavers. hours browsing local stone yards, landscape suppliers, These flat, solid units have a porous texture that helps and building centers to see what’s available in your area. provide traction in wet weather. Brick dimensions Ask about delivery pricing while you’re there. vary by manufacturer and range approximately from 1 Ys to 2W’ in thickness. The standard size (width and length) for sandset (mortarless) installation is 4 x 8”.

I Brick Bricks for mortared jobs are a little smaller to account for the mortar joints. Pavers are also rated for load- Natural clay brick is generally considered the most bearing strength and weather resistance. Types 2 and classic surface material for patios and walkways-a 3 are suitable for heavy foot traffic. SX (or SW) brick well-deserved distinction. With its combination of is for cold climates, MX brick is for warm climates warm, natural coloring and texture and its orderly without a hard frost, and NX brick is for interior geometric shapes, brick is the perfect blend of house applications. Don’t use standard wall brick, fire brick, and garden. And with its small unit size, brick is also or other types of building brick for flooring surfaces.

Clay paving brick has a warm, classic feel that appeals to many homeowners. This traditional paving material is sure to add value to your home as well.

16 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Concrete Pavers Concrete pavers are the most popular alternative to softened, randomly chippe d edges, giving the traditional brick and are installed the same way- paving an age-worn look. The tumbled effect is either sandset or mortared over a concrete slab. an important component of the many cobblestone Like brick, concrete pavers are highly durable, and styles of concrete paving. For sandset installations, their uniform dimensions make them easy to work you can use virtually any typ e of concrete paver. with. While most clay bricks only come in standard Many come with spacing lugs molded into the sides rectangular units, concrete pavers are available in a of each unit- these automatically set an even space wide range of sizes and shapes, including small and between pavers that you fill with sand to complete large rectangles and squares, various interlocking the installation (most clay bricks don’t have spacing designs, and trapezoidal shapes used for circular and lugs, and you have to set the gaps with temporary fan patterns. spacers). For mortared finishes, choose concrete Concrete pavers can be manufactured with pavers with square sides (with or without spacing different textures and edge treatments that can lugs); interlocking styles and other irregular shapes greatly alter their appearance. Among the most make it difficult to fill and finish the mortar joints. popular styles are “tumbled” pavers that have

                                                                     Concrete paver products have evolved
                                                                     from commercial-looking units in basic
                                                                     pink and tan tones to a diverse assortment
                                                                     of colors, shapes, and textures. Pavers
                                                                     are now commonly available in sets of
                                                                     blended colors and shapes for a more
                                                                     natural look; they are tumbled with nicely
                                                                     variegated patterns.

                                                                                        Patio (7 Walkway Basics •   17

I stone Natural stone has an organic beauty that’s unmatched by all other building materials. Stone paving is used all over the world in grand courtyards, ancient road- ways, and back yard landscapes alike. In nature, stones frequently form paths for crossing streams and skirting muddy fields- it’s not surprising, then, that it’s a popular material for patios and walkways. Stone is available in many forms, while the most commonly used types for do-it-yourself projects are flagstone and stone tile.

I Flagstone Flagstone is the general term given to any broad, flat stone that has been split to a thickness of around one to four inches, making it good for paving. Common species of flagstone include sandstone, limestone, bluestone, and slate . Individual stones may have cut edges for paving in linear patterns, while stones with jagged edges and irregular shapes are best for creating a patio or walkway surface with a natural, casual feel. Flagstones can be set in sand or stable (tamped) soil, or they can be permanently laid in mortar over a concrete patio slab or walkway. For an organic, stepping-stone effect, you can space stones widely and fill the gaps with gravel or groundcover plantings. Availability of flagstone varies by region; see what types are offered at local stone yards. For paving on patios and primary walkways, make sure the stone is thick enough for furniture and/or heavy foot traffic and that the surface of the stones won’t become dangerously slick when wet.

                                                                The beauty, strength, and unique character of stone
                                                                makes it a natural choice for all sorts of hardscaping, especially

Natural flagstone is cleft into slabs with irregular shapes patios, walkways, and garden paths. Paving a path with stones and an often interesting, flaky top surface. Flagstone is also of varying shapes and sizes is just one way to create a one-of- available in precut tiles. a-kind paving surface.

18 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I stone Tile Many types of stone can be cut into flat, square, or Most stone tile is too thin to support foot traffic rectangular tiles for outdoor paving. Slate, granite, when laid over a soft base and must be installed in marble, limestone, and quartzite are among the most mortar over a concrete slab. For thicker tiles and common species of stone tile . In contrast to uncut stronger species of stone suitable for sandset paving, flagstone’s natural variation in thickness , shape , check with local suppliers. It’s important to discuss and texture, stone tile is more uniform and closer in your plans with your tile supplier, as not all tiles are appearance to manufactured tile . Its visual effect is a suitable for all applications, especially outdoors. A nice combination of natural texture and coloring with local tile dealer will know what works best in your orderly geometric patterns. local climate.

Buying Stone ~
Flagstone is typically sold by the square yard or by
the ton. Before you start shopping, calculate the area
of your patio in square feet. Stone suppliers can use
this number to estimate your requirements in tons,
if necessary. Buying flagstone in bulk from a stone
yard is less expensive than hand-selecting individual
stones, though you don't get to inspect all of the
pieces in advance. Also, purchasing bulk shipments
preloaded onto pallets helps prevent breakage before
and during delivery. To estimate quantities of stone
tile, calculate the total area you need to cover, then
factor in the thickness of the grout joints. Your tile
supplier can help with these calculations.
       Here are some other things to think about when
considering stone for your patio or walkway:

•   In general, the difficulty of quarrying and
    dressing stone makes it a relatively expensive
    material. The more work that's done to the
    raw material-hand-selection, cutting, and
    finishing-the higher the cost.
•   When it comes to a finished patio, one of the
    main drawbacks of some flagstone is its uneven
    surface, which can lead to wobbly tables and
    the occasional stubbed toe. However, many
    people choose stone specifically for its natural
    "imperfections."
•   Softer flagstone, such as sandstone, can split
    fairly easily if not supported evenly from below.
    Sandstone is also vulnerable to scratches from
                                                         At the other end of the spectrum from irregular, cleft
    shovels, chair legs, and other metal objects.
                                                         flagstone, stone tile surfaces are orderly and refined . Yet,
•   Slate and some other types of flagstone and          even with precise, formal patterns like this, the natural
    tile can be slippery when wet-an important           coloring of stone adds an organic quality that you don't
    consideration for exposed surfaces.                  get with most manufactured tile.

                                                                                                    Patio (7 Walkway Basics •   19

I Poured concrete Most new homes today that include outdoor patios or For first-timers, it’s always a good idea to start with walkways utilize poured concrete surfaces. Concrete something small, such as a walkway or small utility is the default outdoor surface for several reasons: it’s slab, to learn the overall process and the nuances of the cheapest of the hardscape materials, it’s extremely finishing concrete before you tackle a bigger project. durable and virtually maintenance-free, and it involves A poured concrete slab or walkway can be the quickest installation (especially for a professional a finished surface by itself, or it can serve as the concrete crew). Also, if the homeowners don’t like structural foundation for other surface materials, the look of bare concrete, it can always be covered including mortared brick and concrete pavers, stone, with another outdoor material or stained to add a and tile. In fact, mortared finishes must be laid over a permanent touch of color. stable concrete foundation-soil or even compacted The same benefits hold true for a do-it-yourselfer gravel may cause the mortar to crack. Whether you’re building a new concrete patio or walkway. While a leaving the concrete bare or you’re planning to cover big concrete pour is a challenging undertaking for it with a mortared-in material, the basic construction amateurs, a walkway or even a small patio is certainly steps for building the slab are the same, though a bare a doable project. The secret to success is taking the concrete slab requires a little more finishing to ensure time to prepare the site properly, stake your forms a smooth surface. Another popular use of poured well, and watch the wet concrete carefully as it sets concrete is building walkways with concrete molds, as up so you’ll know when to begin the finishing steps. shown on pages 156 to 159.

smooth. flat. and reassuringly sOlid. a poured concrete surface is the best option for those who want a level flooring surface that sweeps clean and stays put virtually forever.

20 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Decorative Effects for Poured concrete While many people like the clean, monolithic look of a plain concrete slab, there are several options for adding decorative touches to a new concrete surface: Seeded concrete is finished with a layer of fine stones for a uniform, yet organic, effect . This is a popular choice for patios because of its multicolored, textured appearance and nonslip surface. A divided concrete slab is poured with permanent wood dividers and border edging, separating the slab into equal sections. In addition to its decorative value, a divided slab is also easier to work with, since it allows you to pour and finish one section at a time, if desired. Tinting and acid staining introduce a range of color options to the familiar cement gray of plain concrete. Commercial colorants, available in both liquid and powdered forms, can be added to wet concrete mix for consistent color throughout the material. This is a good option for mold-formed walkways and other projects that call for small batches of wet concrete. For larger projects, you can order ready-mix concrete in a limited range of colors. Acid One of the best things about poured concrete is its staining is a simple, permanent treatment for cured malleability: in its liquid form, concrete follows curves and concrete slabs and can be applied at any time after angles just as well as straight lines, making it a great medium the concrete has fully cured. for custom shapes and sizes.

                                                                                           Walkway molds are
                                                                                           filled with poured concrete
                                                                                           for easy path or patio
                                                                                           construction . The finished
                                                                                           product has the appearance
                                                                                           of a continuous surface but
                                                                                           does not have the same
                                                                                           structural properties of a
                                                                                           solid concrete walkway.

                                                                                                 Patio (7 Walkway Basics •   21

I Loose Materials Loose materials for patios and walkways encompass permanence of traditional paving, loose materials have a wide range of natural elements, from gravel to a casual, summery feel. Walking over a pathway of wood chips to small river stones. You can use a loose crushed stone or wood chips can feel like a stroll down material by itself to create a simple patio or path a country lane or a walk through the woods. surface or use it as infill between an arrangement of As a primary surface, loose materials offer heavier materials, such as flagstone or large, concrete several practical advantages. They drain well, are stepping pavers. In contrast to the solidity and forgiving of uneven ground, and can be replenished and graded with a rake for a quick facelift. They also tend to be much less expensive than most other paving options and couldn’t be easier to install. In a typical installation, start with a bed of compacted gravel and cover it with landscape fabric to inhibit weed growth and separate the gravel base from the surface material. Then, spread out the surface material a few inches thick, compact it if necessary, and you’re done! For simpler applications, such as a lightly traveled garden path, you can often skip the gravel base and lay the landscape fabric right over leveled and tamped soil. In most cases, it’s best to include a raised edging of some kind to contain the materials and maintain the shape of the paved surface.

                                                                    I Selecting Loose Materials
                                                                    Because different loose materials can have very
                                                                    different textures and properties, it's important to
                                                                    choose the right surface for the application. Here's a
                                                                    look at some of the most popular materials for patios
                                                                    and walkways:
                                                                         Decomposed granite: A popular choice for
                                                                    level patios, paths, and driveways, decomposed granite
                                                                    (DC) can be compacted to a relatively smooth, flat,
                                                                    hard surface. DC consists of small pieces of granite
                                                                    ranging in size from sand-size grains to a quarter
                                                                    inch-this size variation is the reason this material
                                                                    is so compactable. DC is available in various natural
                                                                    shades of gray, brown, and tan. Due to its gritty, sandy
                                                                    finish that can stick to your shoes, DC is not a good
                                                                    choice for surfaces that receive heavy traffic directly to
                                                                    and from the house.
                                                                         Pea gravel and crushed stone: Pea gravel and
                                                                    crushed stone include a broad range of gravel, from

Loose materials can work well on their own or as a fairly fine textures to very coarse. Pea gravel is small- complement to surrounding elements. In this landscape, to medium-sized stone that is either mechanically buff-colored gravel serves as both a primary surface and an infill material for a stepping stone path. The natural look of the crushed or shaped naturally by water. Crushed stone gravel provides a nice contrast to the formal paver walkway typically consists of coarse, jagged pieces in various and patio. sizes, generally larger than pea gravel. Many types of

22 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

gravel are compactable, but usually less so than DG. Gravel made up of round stones is more comfortable to walk on than jagged materials. River rock: Smoothed and rounded by water or machines, river rock ranges from small stones to baseball-sized (and larger) rocks. These smooth surfaces make it more comfortable to walk on than jagged gravel but it is also less compactable and easily displaced underfoot. Larger stones are difficult to walk on and are more suitable for infill and accent areas than for primary paving surfaces. Pea gravel Wood chips: Wood chips and mulch are commonly used as groundcover in planting beds, gardens, and flowerbeds. Most types are soft and springy underfoot, and many can be used for light- traffic paths and even children’s play areas. Wood chips come in a wide variety of grades, colors, and textures. In general, finely chopped and consistent materials are more expensive and more formal in appearance than coarse blends. The term mulch is often used interchangeably with wood chips but can also describe roughly chopped wood and other organic matter that’s best suited for beds and ground cover. Most loose material made of wood needs some Crushed stone replenishing every two to four years. Both stone and wood loose materials are typically sold in bulk at landscape and garden centers and by the bag at home centers. Buying in bulk is often much less expensive for all but the smallest jobs. Landscape and garden suppliers typically offer bulk deliveries for a reasonable flat fee. Due to the variance in terminology and appearance of loose materials, be sure to visit the supplier and take a look at the materials you’re buying firsthand, so you know exactly what to expect. River rock

Decomposed granite Wood chips

                                                                       Patio (7 Walkway Basics •   23

I Tile With its neat, geometric lines and smooth finish, Quarry tile is a durable ceramic tile that comes manufactured tile is a great choice for a formal patio unglazed in many colors. It often has a flat but slightly or a nicely appointed front entry. In warm climates, abrasive surface for good slip-resistance. tile is a common outdoor material, often seen in Terra-cotta tile has a warm, natural appearance, courtyards and fountain plazas paved with large, usually in mottled earth tones. It looks great on handmade earthen tiles. In colder regions, outdoor patios, but because it is somewhat porous, it is not tile must be nearly impervious to water to withstand recommended for use in cold climates. winter’s freeze-thaw cycles. Tile should always be Saltillo tile is a dried, rather than fired, tile similar installed over a concrete slab. In fact, this is one of its to terra cotta but with a more imperfect, handmade main uses-the thin profile of most tile makes it a good character. It is also only suitable for mild climates. material for covering a drab, old concrete surface with Porcelain tile is the toughest, hardest, and often a fresh, new finish. most expensive manufactured tile you can buy. It is highly resistant to water and therefore a good choice for patios in most climates. I Selecting Tile When shopping for outdoor tile, be sure to discuss your plans with knowledgeable sales staff. A good tile Indoors, you can use just about any kind of floor tile, dealer can help you choose the right type and style of but patios are a very different matter. Patio tile must tile for your application and the local climate. They be strong enough to survive scrapes from outdoor can also help you select appropriate grout and provide furniture as well as years of weather and sun exposure. maintenance tips for keeping your patio surface in shape More importantly, patio tile must be slip-resistant, throughout the years. Be aware that some tile can discolor which automatically rules out most glazed tile. The or fade over time, due to sun exposure. Sealing grout and, main types of tile suitable for outdoor use are quarry, in some cases, tile surfaces are often recommended to terracotta, and porcelain, in addition to natural stone prevent staining and to prolong the life of the installation; (see page 19). ask your tile dealer for recommendations.

                                                                                 Tile adds a highly finished look to a
                                                                                 patio floor-perfect for an outdoor room
                                                                                 with an indoor feel. Like standard floor tile,
                                                                                 patio tiles are set into a mortar bed (over
                                                                                 a flat concrete slab); then are grouted to
                                                                                 complete the job.

24 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Green Materials As is true for most building projects, installing are available in several standard sizes for general a new patio or walkway presents a number of paving and in large stepping stone sizes. For concrete environmentally friendly alternatives. One way to pavers, look for products made with recycled glass go green is to choose paving materials made with aggregate. Recycled rubber is used in a number of recycled components or to use reclaimed materials, different products, including “paver” patio mats (see such as salvaged brick, reclaimed timbers, or chunks pages 121 and 123) and granulated mulch for loose- of old concrete. It’s also smart to consider how your fill applications and play areas. If you’re looking patio will shed runoff water and how that might affect for eco-friendly edging for a patio or path, consider local flooding zones and waterways. flexible edging and landscape timbers made from There are many different options for recycled recycled plastic. paving, as well as edging and other landscaping Permeable paving is an important element of materials. For loose material paving and infill green landscape design for the simple reason that it applications, you can buy recycled crushed brick in allows storm water to filter into the ground instead a range of textures. Pavers made from recycled glass of flowing into municipal drainage systems, where it contributes to flooding problems and contamination of local waterways. Permeable patio and walkway surfaces include sandset pavers and stone, as well as all loose materials, while poured concrete and mortared surfaces are essentially impermeable. From a green standpoint, impermeable surfaces are fine as long as your patio or walkway is sloped toward an area of natural ground that is large enough to capture and absorb all (or most) seasonal runoff. However, if you have a large paved surface that drains onto another impermeable surface, such as a driveway or street, consider using a permeable paving material instead of solid concrete, or plan for an adequate buffer zone of natural ground between the new surface and other paved areas.

                                                                Resources for
                                                                Green Materials ~
                                                                Recycled-brick loose material (Brick Nuggets):
                                                                  cunninghambrick.com
                                                                Glass pavers: environmentalhomecenter.com
                                                                Concrete pavers: glass-recycling.com
                                                                Rubber patio pavers: gardeners.com
                                                                Rubber mulch: americanrubber.com
                                                                Plastic landscape edging: mastermark.com
                                                                Plastic landscape timbers & lumber:
                                                                  amazingrecycled .com

Using salvaged brick for patios, walkways, or edging Permeable pavers: www.belgard.biz/environmental- is a good application for reusing materials. This yard also pavers.htm forgoes grass for mulch, which saves on water use. The yard is still a lush green due to the hardy vines and low- maintenance shrubs. Note: Not all salvaged brick is suitable To minimize shipping distances from specialty for primary paving surfaces. When setting brick in mortar, be suppliers, search online for a manufacturer near you. sure to use compatible mortar to prevent cracking

                                                                                                   Patio (7 Walkway Basics •   25

IPractical Considerations

I n addition to the creative work of planning the look and feel of a patio space, there are several practical matters that must be addressed before you can hit Visualizing Your Patio ~ Create a quick mock-up to help you plan your the drawing board. Thinking about how you will use patio’s size, shape, and location. Mark the proposed the patio will help you answer one of the biggest space with rope or garden hose, and set out any questions-how much space you’ll need. The planning furniture you’ll use. See how it all looks from different stage is also the time to consider environmental points on your lot, as well as from inside the house. factors, including site drainage, sunlight, and wind, to make sure your patio will be both comfortable and usable whenever you’re ready to get outside. Finally, it’s a good idea (and possibly required by law) to check with your city’s building department to learn about building code requirements and zoning restrictions that might affect your project plans.

I Use How you plan to spend time on your patio will influence many of your design decisions, so it’s best to start the planning process by brainstorming with everyone in your household. What will be the primary uses for the space? Dining, entertaining, sunbathing, playing with the kids, enjoying the view? Once you establish the uses, see if you can accommodate all of those activities within an attractive, efficient design. For some, the solution lies simply in providing adequate space in a flexible floor plan-a quick shift in furniture, for example, can set the stage for the next activity. In thinking about everything you hope to do on your new patio, imagine the ideal setup for each activity. For example, if you have young children, maybe you want a comfortable sitting area near an edge of the patio that’s adjacent to a sandbox (or even a sandbox built into the patio; when the youngest has outgrown it, you can turn it into a planting bed). Or maybe you want some space on the patio for a baby If your plan is to refurbish an existing patio, pool or a fountain for the kids to play in. think hard about what you like and dislike about A patio that’s good for entertaining, as well as the current setup. A patio that’s too small can be everyday uses, requires a balanced plan. Large, open areas expanded along its borders or can be connected are best for hosting parties, but can feel empty and overly with a walkway to a new, separate patio space exposed for a small group of diners. To accommodate designed for other uses. Often patios don’t get both, separate expansive areas from more intimate spaces used because they’re uncomfortable or uninviting with a change in floor level or create a more personal, during free time. For example, if you get home sheltered space by tucking a furniture set into a corner from work just as the western sun is blasting the under an arbor. And don’t forget to include some personal area with heat, you’ll probably stay inside. The space: the perfect spot where your favorite chair is always solution is a simple shade barrier that blocks those ready for a little reading time or a quick snooze. afternoon rays.

26 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Size & Layout The ideal size and configuration for your patio is To plan traffic routes, allow a minimum of 22” of determined by the space needed for each activity, width for main passages between and alongside activity including plenty of room for easy access and intervening areas (32” minimum for wheelchair access). The main traffic. With the floor space allocated, you can begin goal is having enough room for people to move around playing around with different layouts, design elements, the patio without disrupting any activities. and shapes until the form of the space complements all of its functions. All the while, keep the big picture in mind-make sure the proportions and general design I Take a step Back of the patio complement your house and the rest of the landscape. As your patio plans develop, try to envision the design within its context. Does the size seem appropriate for the house and lot? How do the size and layout I How Much Space? translate to atmosphere? While it’s important to make a patio large enough for all its intended uses, there’s Time to think again about all the uses you have also a risk in making it too large. With interior rooms, planned for the patio. If you already have the patio some people like the grandeur and openness of a furniture, set it up on the proposed site and experiment sprawling great room with a cathedral ceiling, while with different arrangements to get a sense of how others find the expansive space uncomfortable for much space each furniture grouping will need. If you personal activities like reading or quiet conversation. don’t have the furniture yet, see the illustration below Architects often design in terms of “human scale,” for suggestions on spacing. Next, decide which areas creating spaces that are large enough to accommodate you want to be dedicated for specific activities and the human body in its everyday activities but small which can be rearranged for multiple uses. Cooking enough to provide a comfortable sense of space and and dining areas are best as static, or anchored, enclosure. On a patio, you can establish the proper scale stations, while an informal sunbathing spot defined by with clear barriers, such as fences and overheads, or with a couple of lounge chairs can easily be rearranged or boundaries that rely more on perception-low walls, moved as needed. plantings, or even just a change in flooring materials.

               I                                                                                                             ,           r
               I
                                                    Bench                                                                    ' . Pr:imary
               It--- __ _
                                                                                                                            : traffic
                                                                                                                            , route
                                                                                                                                                I
    Primary I
    traffic :
    route
                     .
                            ...., ... _~_....,...._....,...._.....,...._~
                                .           ----         ___ i- r--         I                                            . t 22 to 3."
                                                                                                                         I
                                                                                                                             I              I
    22 to 36t        .                   Second~ry traffic                      .                                       J
                                                                                                                                           I
                                                                                                                                           , ....-_ _--.
               I ----...                 route 22"                                                                                        I
                                                                                                                                      I
 -+-~-t-.,- I  'II                        -~-.;..     ------
               I
               I.                                                                                                           48 "·
           -
               I
               I
                                                                                ~-:--J.-+-_ _+-_-+!....-_---,..j   ·I.-.,....-------.I
                                                                                                                    f+
 -+-~-+-..,-- :
       .....

           -
               I
               I
                I
               .1
                                                                                                                     1
               I                                                                       Table for
                                                                                      ' J()ur 11Z"

          ..

When arranging your patio, consider the placement of furniture and permanent structures as well as the space needed for primary traffic routes. These routes should have a minimum width of 22” to allow for comfortable passage throughout the patio.

                                                                                                                                 Patio (7 Walkway Basics •   27

I zoning Laws, Building Codes & Utilities

                                                                                                    lity lines   Easement

                                                                                    '..'.. ,           -- - .
                                                                                         .."
                                                                                       '~\

                                                                                           '~'. Proposed patio
                                                                                               ""

Contact local utility companies to have all utility lines marked on your property. This is necessary before digging in your yard, and it could affect your patio location. Utility companies promptly send out a representative to mark the lines.

Any alterations made to your lot could fall under your municipality’s zoning laws. In the case of a new patio, zoning laws might limit locations for the patio and how much ground it can cover. The latter relates to the allowable percentage of development on the lot (adding a large patio now could preclude future Always check your municipality’s zoning laws when planning a new patio project. plans for a home addition). Also make sure the patio conforms to setback restrictions (required distance from lot lines) and easements (zones that must be accessible for utilities and other public services). Another important consideration involves the Walls, fire features, or overhead structures may be rooms that lead to the patio. For example, if outdoor subject to standards set by the local building codes, dining is one of your primary activities, locating the and you may need to obtain building permits. patio near the kitchen will prove to be an enormous Discuss your complete plans with an official at the convenience. Similarly, a patio used frequently local municipality’s planning office for zoning laws. If for large parties should not be accessed through a you run into snags, ask about alternatives; for example, bedroom or other private space. This is not only an a poured concrete patio may not be allowed over an inconvenience, guests feel uncomfortable walking easement, but a less permanent, sandset surface may through private or formal areas of a home. be approved. Also, contact the local utility companies to have all utility lines marked on your property. Most states are part of the North American One Call Referral I Atmosphere System (888 -258-0808), which will contact all of the Perhaps the most important elements of all are the utilities in your area to have lines in your yard marked. everyday factors that affect the quality of life on a patio, including sunlight, noise, privacy, and views. Does the site get eno ugh sunlight (or too much) at I Access the times you’re most likely to use it? Are noise levels acceptable-or will you need to put up a fence? Will Like most recreation and relaxation areas, a patio you feel overly exposed and on display, or too shut tends to be used more often if it’s easily accessible. in ? Finally, what you see from the patio has a big The same is true of visual access. Full views, or even impact on the atmosphere . If there are no good views just glimpses, of the patio from several interior rooms available, add landscaping, plants, or decorations to will beckon you outdoors on nice days. create a pleasant view.

28 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Dealing with Drainage It’s not unusual that a new patio creates, or is subject low point keeps the rest of the yard relatively dry. to, drainage problems. One common cause is a hard Diverting excess water is only half of the paved surface that sheds water instead of absorbing battle-the water also needs a place to go. Ideally, it it and deposits it along the lower edge of the patio. is collected on your property, where it filters through There, the water collects, creating a swampy area the soil and returns to natural aquifers. This can of grass. During heavy rains, runoff water can build be achieved with a dry well (see pages 49 to 50) or up enough force to wash out flower beds bordering with a swale leading to a natural collection area in a patio. Drainage problems can also occur when the landscape (see pages 46 to 48). Another option the water has no escape, a common condition with is to divert excess runoff to a street gutter or a storm sunken or recessed patios that are surrounded by drain, but this design must be approved by the city’s retaining walls or ascending slopes. Additionally, planning department. For further discussion on adding or removing soil or plants to make room for a surface drainage and environmental considerations, patio can alter natural drainage patterns, potentially see page 25. resulting in an unpleasant surprise with the first good Enclosed or recessed patios may require their ram. own drainage system, typically with some type of Fortunately, all of these problems can be solved floor drain. The patio surface slopes toward the drain, with an appropriate drainage system. For patio runoff, located either in the center or along one side, where a drainage swale or perimeter trench is usually runoff water collects in a subsurface catch basin. effective. These are sloped channels or trenches that From there, an underground drainpipe carries the collect excess groundwater and divert it to a collection water to a collection point. If you think your patio point. A trench running along the lowest edge of the will need this type of system, consult an engineer or patio can collect water directly from the patio surface. qualified landscape professional early in the planning If the patio is at the top of a natural slope leading to a process to discuss your options. low point in the yard, a drainage swale located in the

                                                                     Patio surface slopes
                                                                     away from house
                                                                     'Is to V.' per ft.

A perimeter trench filled with drainage gravel and drain tile can Trench help remove excess patio runoff that doesn’t drain well into the yard. Coarse gravel Perforated drainpipe (drain tile) slopes ‘14” per ft. toward collection point

                                                                                                     Patio (7 Walkway Basics •   29

I Climate Control Careful planning can’t change the weather, but it can receives the right amount and intensity of sunlight at the help you make the best of prevailing conditions. By time of day- and the season- when you’ll use it most. controlling or using sunlight and shade, wind, and Remember that the sun’s path changes throughout the natural air currents, you can make your patio the most year. In summer, it rises high in the sky along the east- comfortable place in your outdoor landscape. Consider west axis, creating shorter shadows and more exposure the following: overall. In winter, the sun’s angle is relatively low, Sunlight and shadows: The unalterable pattern resulting in long shadows in the northwest, north, and of the sun is one of the few climatic systems you can northeast directions. To avoid shadows altogether, locate count on. The tricky part is positioning your patio so it your patio away from the house and other structures.

                                                                        N
                                   North-lacing latio
                                   partially sha ed all
                                   summer and shaded                                                   Summer Winter
                                   all day in the winter                                               sun ~ sun

         West-lacing
         patio receives
         sunlight from
                                                              \             East-lacing patio
                                                                            receives cooler
                                                                            early-morning to           N             i
                                                                  \
         early afternoon                                                    mid-afternoon sun
         to sunset

                                   South-lacing patio
                                   receives sunlight
                                   all day

Remember to consider the amount of sunlight your patio will receive to make sure your planned project will meet your needs.

       Summer                                                                                          Winter
       afternoon                                                                                       evening
                                                                                 Winter
                                                                                 afternoon

                                                        Summer
                                                        evening

                                                                        Winter
                                                                        morning

        Summer
        morning

Shadows follow the east-west axis in the summer. Winter shadows point to the northeast and northwest and are relatively long at midday.

30 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

                                              Solid                                                          Filtering
                                              barrier                                                        barrier

Barriers help control wind patterns around your patio. Solid barriers drive wind currents upward, creating a forcible reversal in direction. Filtering barriers allow wind to pass through, reducing its force in the process.

 Wind currents can ruin your patio peace as surely               Patio materials and orientation: The

as a rainstorm. Shielding yourself from wind takes surface material you choose can also affect the patio careful planning and sometimes trial and error. Since environment. Dark-colored, solid surfaces-like brick you can’t protect against all wind, first determine the or dark stone-absorb a lot of heat during the day direction of prevailing winds-the most frequent and and may become uncomfortable to walk on in sunny strongest wind currents affecting your site (prevailing areas . However, after the sun goes down, stored heat winds may change with the sd§l8rl9weirt of your arr<r’t’!fulfcP@‘6’:ifi9ttllispaving can warm the air on the on the best location for a windR:5gffi\y’ 8\lJf!~~ead the fenc81tlB~ 8<mdlrWcth 6 reflect heat and can restrict appearances, a solid barrier oftt~~ Itbt the most cooling breezes. Because cold air sinks, low-lying effective windbreak; these barriers force air currents patios or those positioned at the base of an incline to swoop over the top and then drop down on the tend to be cooler than higher areas of the landscape. backside, returning to full strength at a distance roughly If you’re building an overhead specifically for equal to the barrier’s height. A more reliable windbreak shade, experiment with alternative materials, such is created with a lattice or louvered fence that diffuses as bamboo screening or fabric, to filter sunlight and and weakens the wind as it passes through the barrier. control wind.

                                  Walls and fences                                                             Cool air drops
                                  trap and reflect .. c,a. .....                                               and settles in
                                                                                                               low areas

                    Light surfaces
                    reflect heat
                    during the
                    day

Dark surfaces absorb heat in day and release heat at night

                                                                                           Surface materials, barriers,
                                                                                         and the patio's elevation within the
                                                                                      landscape all have an effect on the
                                                                                   space's temperature and comfortability.

                                                                                                       Patio (7 Walkway Basics •   31

IPatio & Walkway Plans

T his section offers a different kind of inspiration from the section on design themes. Here you’ll see detailed patio and landscape plans for several different The five designs, starting on the following page, are shown in plan, or aerial, view. This is the perspective that professionals us e to do much types of properties, each showing specific design of their design work, as it provides not only a solutions for making the most of the available space bird’s-eye view of th e en tire site, it’s also the best and existing conditions. One or more of the properties way to see how th e patio, walkways, and other might resemble your own, but even if none of them elements relate to the house and surrounding does, don’t worry; the idea is to see how various landscape . Plan drawings of your own property elements can be put to us e and to think about how can be quite h elpful in designing and planning a some of those solutions might work in your own plan. new patio or path project (see below).

    Drawing Your Own Plans ~
    Unless you need them for getting a permit or other official                                  project site and as much of the surrounding area as is
    business, detailed drawings of your site and new projects                                    relevant. The site plan should include:
    are optional. But there are a few good reasons to map out                                    •    The house (at least the wall adjacent to the patio),
    your property and at least sketch your basic plans onto                                           including doors, windows, and light fixtures
    paper. Scaled drawings are good for showing relationships                                    •    Trees, significant plantings, and other
    between elements and overall proportions within a plan, and                                       landscaping features
    are helpful for estimating materials and making shopping                                     •    Gutter downspouts, outdoor faucets, and
    lists. If you hire out any of the work, detailed drawings will be                                 electrical outlets
    invaluable for obtaining accurate bids and to help you keep                                  •    Notes about prevailing winds, lot grading (for sloping
    the project on track during construction. Also, sketches are                                      sites), and natural drainage routes
    always useful for conveying or experimenting with ideas.                                     •    Views (good and bad) from the patio site
           When making your own drawings, it's best to work                                      •    Sun and wind patterns
    from a base map, or site plan-an aerial view of the

        O
                                                                                                                         House
                   Faucet    Windows                                                                                                                      Li hts
          I.     ~lIer /              ~utlet \.                                         I,

                                                                                       - :1 :~:~el ~~S~i" ' " I                                           Outdoor               o ~ ortared

       ~
                                                                         ,-.     I. ~                    F ucet
                                                                                                                                           Outlet         kitchen         _     / 1!lagstone
           1. :Wind'     r~                              '"
                                                                           ~ \1 II~.,
                                                                         ' .                                                                                                           ining table
       01
       - - - .. -
                  · 0 ""    .'                                                  c:
                                                                                                         ~Vfl~gstone .                         .,.-_
                                                                                                                                                                                    I.

                                                                                                                                                                                       j
        ------
          - - - -......~...                                                                  I                                                                                       ~
                 .......... . "'                                     -
                    -"",',',                        ,. 4. __ _C.-/                           I                                                  Firepit                            Tree
                                                   I" ~                            "
               -r"""'-.     ',,-
                                 \ \\ ,
                                          \

                                              .                                              I
                                                                                             I          \1              .,.0 .     l
                                                                                                                                                                                     ~Iexible
            Tree                     \ \ ,
                                      \ \ ,
                                                          \t' L
                                                               awn
                                                                            ,\ ,
                                                                                                                ,   (    .I~ ~r~ac~~ _- -
                                                                                                                                      : ';..
                                                                                                                                                                                    ./.
                                                                                                                                                                                  -----+invisible)
                                                                                                                                                                                         plastic
                                 \
                                 I,   ,       " ,...-l
                                              ,                      \I                                  Tree                Gravel                         If                tI.• I{ edging
                            If        ~
                                      , .                     ",         , \"                                                  \,.                  II,
                                                                                                                                                                   Lawn

An accurately scaled site plan puts your property into Sketch your designs onto clean copies of the site plan, or perspective and helps you think like a designer. Create a plan use an overlay of tracing paper for each new drawing. As you using your own measurements or locate the plat map or refine your plans, create more detailed, smaller-scale drawings original blueprints of your property (check with the local city of the patio/walkway site and immediate surroundings. or county planning offices or your mortgage/title company).

32 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Sample Patio Plan 1 Like most lots in established urban neighborhoods, area; the fountain also helps dampen the city’s noise . this back yard space was short on both space and A vine-covered arbor (or trellis) provides shade and privacy. But by devoting most of the area to two patios privacy for half of the lounge area and a portion of the and the rest to planting beds, this design provides smaller planting bed. ample room for entertaining, outdoor dining, and Opposite the lounge area, a cozy corner patio is even gardening. the perfect stage for intimate gatherings and everyday Th e main patio space is paved with cut stone for a meals. Its natural flagston e floor is two short steps natural yet clean look and a smooth surface that’s good up from the main patio surface. This, along with the for nighttime parties and frequent traffic between the decorative post-and-beam gate, gives the dining space hou se and the back gate. In one corner, a flagstone a special, secluded feel. A fan -shaped arbor could be coffee table and fountain define a casual “lounge” added here for shade and more privacy.

                                                   House

                                                   Back door
                         Existing concrete
                         steps

perimeter fence I Flagstone coffee table

                       Flagstone
                       step up
                       to raised
                       dining space            Cut-stone paving
                                                                              [

                                             Post & beam
                                             arch/gate
                                                                  I

                                               I                  I           r   Plantinglflower bed

                        Natural
                        flagstone
                        dining space
                                                           Gate
                                                   I   ,              ,   I

This multifunctional design adds privacy while creating multiple spaces for enterta ining.

                                                                                                        Patio (7 Walkw ay Basics •   33

I Sample Patio Plan 2 Sloping gro und can be a challenge for patio plans, slop e and provides a backdrop (and backsplash ) fo r an but can also be an opport un ity for creating dramatic L-shaped outdoor kitchen. feat ures or perspectives you can’t get with a flat The low wall at the north end of the patio retains surface. In this back yard site, the area near the earth for th e patio surface and h elps create a lofty middle of the house was relatively close to grade. feel for th e sitting area o utside the home’s master Adding a few retaining walls allowed the patio to bedroom . A planter with trees provides a subtle extend out to both sides. One retaining wall cuts into barrier between the sitting area and the main patio the slope along the south end of the site, providing space. O ut on the yard’s planted slope, a set of stone space and a boundary for a paver walkway linking steps leads to gently climbing stepping stone paths the patio to the front yard. This abuts a four-foot -tall laid ou t for either strolling through the foliage or masonry wall that carves a 90-degree space into the tending to garden plan ts.

                      Low retaining
                      wall

                                               House
                                                                           II
                                                                           II
                                                                           II    Master bedroom
                        Paver walkway                                      II
                        to front yard
                                                                           II

                                                                                                    Low interlocking
                                                                                                    block retaining
                                                                            Concrete paver          wall
                                                                            patio

                                                                                Lawn

                                                      Stepping
                                                                                              Wood chips/pea gravel
                                   ~.{"~~;...-..-:-~r stone path
                     .-~.J..-_o'

                                                    Stepping stones for
                                                    ac(:essinlg garden                          Play structure

                                                              Garden/planting
                                                     '- - -area on slope

TO make the most of a sloping yard, use reta ining wa lls, steps, and paths to emphasize gran d views an d allow easy access to ga rden areas.

34 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Sample Patio Plan 3 This grand design, created for a large sub urban or rural designed for a few lounge chairs or perhaps a bistro set property, has a setting for every mood and occasion: used for drinks or everyday meals. the expansive brick patio provides an elegant venue for Away from the main patio, two destinations both formal and cas ual en tertaining. Guests (and kids) offer getaways of distinc tly differen t ch aracter: will feel more than welcome to step out onto the lawn follow the pebbled stepping-stone path throu gh for back yard games or a stroll thro ugh th e grounds . th e arch way to th e sun-sh eltered garden view from In addition to its ample open space, the brick the gazebo. Or, stroll across the lawn after dark patio serves as an en tryway to a screened porch-a for stargazing arou nd th e open fire on th e circular welcome retreat for hot, wet, or buggy weather. At gravel patio. the other end, the patio surrounds a small su n deck

                                                             House

                                                                                                         Brick
                                                                                                         raised
                                                                                                         planter
           Brick
           raised
           planter                                                                      Pebbled stepping
                             Brick                                                      stone path
                             walkway
                             & Patio
                                                      Lawn
                                                                                            Decorative
                                                                                            archway

                                                                                            Gazebo
                                    Stone edging

                                       Gravel patio
                                       w/fire pit

This design provides outdoor rooms for all purposes- gathe ri ng around a fi re, dining, sunbathi ng, relaxing in a screened -in porch, or enjoying the view from a gazebo.

                                                                                                           Patio (7 Walkway Basics •   35

I Sample Patio Plan 4 Casual and organic in feel, this plan with sandset integrated sandbox keeps the kids near the house flagstone surfaces embodies the spirit of the ranch and out of the hot afternoon sun. Both the sandbox home, in which the patio is used as an extension of and integrated flow erbed are simply excavated areas the indoor spaces. Running the full length of the filled with play sand over soil and landscape fabric. home, the patio is accessible from several different In keeping with the natural look of the patio rooms and is likewise visible from each. paving, flagstones are used for a well-traveled walkway An arbor with vine-covered trellis screen defines between the front and back yards, while a compacted and shelters a dining space located just outside gravel path with natural stone edging creates an of the home’s kitchen. And for the cook, a large attractive service road leading from the shed to the planting bed adjacent to the patio provides easy back garden. access to fresh herbs, fruits, and vegetables. An

                                                 House

   Sandset
   flagstone
   walkway                                                                                             Shed
   to front
   yard

                                             Sandbox                                               Compacted
                                                                                                   gravel path
                                                                       Arbor                       with stone ___
               Flower bed
                                                                                                   edging        ----
                                                         Sand set
                                                         flagstone
                                                         patio

                                                                    Lawn
                                 Flower & herb
                                 garden

                                                                       Garden

                                   Mound planted
                                   with trees

This sandset flagstone patio is accessible from multiple areas around the house, seamlessly integrating indoor and outdoor living.

36 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Sample Patio Plan 5 This new suburban property presented a challenge to Because it faces the street, is well-integrated with the standard patio plan: the back of the house seemed the house, and is partially sheltered with overheads, just right for a full-sized patio, but the neighboring the entry patio feels a lot like a traditional front porch. property was so close that the view from the patio A low masonry wall adds definition and a sense would be dominated by the neighbor’s kitchen (and of enclosure to the patio. However, to maintain a their back yard patio). The better view was from the welcoming feel for the front entry, a large opening in front of the house. Therefore, this design places the the wall leaves plenty of room for the existing concrete main patio space around the front door, incorporating walkway. Also, the walkway remains uninterrupted the existing entry stoop and portico. A second, smaller from the sidewalk to the front stoop, clearly indicating patio made with circular concrete pavers serves as a the direct route to the front door. The patio paving is landing and casual sitting area just outside the patio level with the walkway so the entire space is useable door leading to the back yard. as a patio surface when needed.

                                                                                     Circular
                                                                                     concrete
                                                                                     paver patio
                                                                             /

                                               House

Driveway

                                                                                   portico

                                             Brick patio                                       Masonry wall
                                             surface            New pergola

                                                                                               Existing
                                                                                               concrete
                                                                                               walkway

If the best view of your home is in the front, consider constructing a landscaped patio around your home’s existing entryway, as shown in this design. A small patio in back is still a practical addition for greater privacy.

                                                                                                     Patio (7 Walkway Basics •   37

IL----_ _ _ __

Patio Projects T ime to break ground. This chapter covers all of the most popular patio materials in complete step-by- step projects. You’ll also find a few projects for taking care of specific site challenges, such as drainage and sloping ground, before getting started on the patio construction. When you’re ready to begin your paving project, be sure to read the Layout & Surface Preparation section on pages 40 to 45. This includes detailed steps for setting up reference lines and creating a stable foundation for any type of patio surface. If you’re still weighing your options with different patio materials, consider ease of installation: the fastest and easiest patios to build are those made with loose materials. Next are sandset surfaces that require careful planning and layout, but it’s relatively easy to correct mistakes. With m ortared surfaces, you’re working against the clock to get everything set and cleaned up before the mortar hardens, and mistakes are tough to fix. Poured concrete is the most challenging material, due to the time sensitivity and the finer points of finishing.

In this chapter: • Layout & Surface • Acid-Stained Preparation Concrete Patio • Drainage Swales • Seeded Concrete & Wood Patio • Dry Wells • Tiled Concrete Slab • Retaining Walls • Loose Materials Patio • Cobblestone Paver Patio • Loose-fill Patio with • Circular Paver Patio Fire Pit • Mortared Paver Patio • Wood Tile • Sandset Flagstone Patio • Rubber Tile • Mortared Flagstone Patio • Patio Edging • Concrete Slab Patio • Sandset Brick Patio • 39

ILayout & Surface Preparation

T he first major step of any patio project is to set up guide strings. Once that’s finished, excavation begins and then a layer of gravel is added. The gravel drop distance of the patio surface will be 1 Yz”. In the following project, you’ll calculate the drop distance by measuring from the house (or high edge of the patio) to is an essential element of patio construction: like your the batterboards at the low edge . The batterboards are house’s foundation, it creates a flat, stable base for set about 12” beyond the finished patio edges, and this building upon; and it protects the surface material by additional amount makes the final drop distance more providing drainage underneath to minimize shifting accurate than using the finished patio dimensions. and settling caused by seasonal freeze-thaw cycles. The final step before you start digging is to locate There are a few matters to take care of before underground utility lines in the project site. Call your you begin the layout and surface prep work. The first utility service providers or a national provider (see is to determine the thickness of each layer of the Resources, page 250) to have your lines marked. patio construction. This includes the thicknesses of the surface material, the sand bed (if required), and the gravel subbase. For most patio types, the gravel Tools & Materials ~ layer should be four inches thick (after compaction). Concrete slab patios call for six inches of gravel, but Drill Lumber (2 x 2, this is subject to the local building code and may vary Circular saw 2 x 4) by region. The combined thicknesses of the layers Hammer 2Y2” coarse-thread minus the distance the patio surface will stand above Level drywall screws the ground gives you the depth of the excavation. Hand maul Common nails The height of the finished patio aboveground is Mason’s string Compactable gravel up to you. The standard minimum height is one inch. Line level Eye and ear This ensures the patio will drain properly, but it’s low Power sod cutter or protection enough to cut any bordering grass with a mower. lawn edger Work gloves The next factor to determine is the total drop Excavation tools Rope or garden hose distance-the change in elevation from the high end to Bow rake Marking paint the low end of the patio surface. This creates the slope Plate compactor or Flat spade necessary for water runoff. Your patio should slope hand tamp U-shaped wire away from the house foundation or other adjacent Shovel stakes (optional) structure (and preferably away from main traffic Wheelbarrow Landscape fabric routes) at a rate of lis” per linear foot. For example, Plumb bob (optional) if your patio will extend 12” from your house, the

                                                                            Set up batterboards for the layout
                                                                            strings to easily remove and replace
                                                                            strings without losing the slope and layout
                                                                            settings. A story pole-measured against
                                                                            temporary cross strings-makes it easy
                                                                            to check the depth of each layer as you
                                                                            work. Remember to ca ll utility companies
                                                                            to have them mark utility lines in or near
                                                                            the project site before excavating.

40 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Prepare & Excavate a Patio Site

construct the batterboards from Roughly mark the patio corners Drive pairs of batterboards about 2 x 4 lumber and 2%” screws: cut the with 2 x 2 stakes. Cut the 2 x 2 ends to 2 ft. behind the stakes, holding them batterboard legs 24” long, and then a taper (the greater the angle, the easier plumb and level. The tops of the taper the ends to a point. Cut the cross- it will be to drive into the ground). Tap crosspieces should be about 12” above pieces at 24”. Align and fasten the legs the tapered end into the ground with a the ground . If the patio abuts the house, perpendicular to the ends of the cross- hand maul or sledgehammer. drive a single 2 x 4 stake at each corner pieces. Use a nail or screw at the top so one face of the stake is even with the center of each crosspiece. planned edge of the patio.

Tie a mason’s string taut between an outer batterboard nail Begin setting the slope on the first layout string: stand the and one of the house-side (or high edge of the patio) stakes. pole next to the batterboard and mark the height of the level Attach a line level (inset) to the string and adjust the stakes as mason’s string. Measure between the house (or high side) needed until the string is perfectly level. stake to the batterboard, then calculate the drop distance for the string-a common slope is %” per linear foot. (continued)

                                                                                                                     Patio Projects •   41

using the story pole as a guide, drive the batterboard Set up the remaining three string lines so they are even down until the string is even with the drop distance mark. with the outer edges of the finished patio and are just touching Make sure the crosspiece remains level across the top so the the first string. First install the two strings parallel to the house, string’s height won’t change if you move the string later. and use the line level to confirm they are leve l. The final string (parallel to the first string) will have the proper slope when it touches the intersecting strings.

Variation: Use a rope or a garden hose to layout curved or freeform patio edges. Mark the outline onto the ground with marking paint. Once you complete the subbase, you can repeat the process to guide the installation. Note: Curving patios still need a string layout to guide the excavation and base prep.

42 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

                                                                                            Checking for
                                                                                            Square ~
                                                                                          The traditional 3-4-5 technique can
                                                                                          also be used for larger multiples of
                                                                                          3,4, and 5. This provides greater
                                                                                          accuracy for larger patios. For
                                                                                          example, use 6, 8, and 10ft.

                                                                                          Alternatively, you can use a long
                                                                                          tape to measure between opposing
                                                                                          corners of the layout. When the
                                                                                          measurements are equal, the layout
                                                                                          IS square.

Make sure the string layout is perfectly square using the 3-4-5 squaring technique: starting at one of the string intersections, measure along one string and make a mark at 3 ft. (or a multiple of 3 ft.). Measure along the perpendicular string and mark at 4 ft. Measure between the two marks: the distance should equal 5 ft. If not, adjust the strings as needed until the measurements come out correctly. Repeat the process at the diagonally opposed corner. Mark the string positions onto the batterboard crosspieces.

Determine the finished height of the patio surface. If the On your story pole, mark a top line for the distance from the patio abuts the house, the finished surface should be 1 to 3” string line (measured at the high edge of the patio) to the full below the typical threshold of an entry door. At the low end of excavation depth. A second line represents the distance from the patio it’s desirable to have the finished surface rise at least the string to the top of the compacted gravel base. Be sure to 1” above the surrounding ground to facilitate drainage and account for the thickness of the paving material and sand bed prevent dirt and mud from washing onto the patio. as needed. (continued)

                                                                                                                     Patio Projects •   43

 11

Cut the sod along the project outline using a flat-end spade Strip the sod or vegetation inside the outlined area and or a power lawn edger. To compensate for edging, extend the then excavate the construction area to a depth that allows for excavation about 6” beyond the finished patio outline. Reserve a 6” -thick gravel subbase, a 1” layer of sand, and the paver healthy sod for covering soil backfill behind the edging. thickness; account for the finished height aboveground also.

                                                                                                                               ..-

    3                                                                                                              i-
                                                                                                                       -
                                                                                                                   ~


                                                                                                               L       ~   -

Grade and compact the soil. First use a bow rake to Use the story pole to check the depth as you work. Drive achieve the proper slope, and then compact the soil with a a pair of 2 x 2 stakes outside of the original string layout, and rented plate or hand tamper. Set up temporary cross strings tie on the cross string so it’s just touching the layout strings. for reference to simplify the excavation and the gravel Check the depth at several points along the cross string, installation later. removing or adding soil as needed to achieve the proper depth. Once that’s done, move the cross string to the next section and repeat. Note: Thoroughly tamp any soil that’s been added to a low spot to minimize future settling. For the same reason, it’s best to use soil from the immediate area (instead of purchased topsoil) or fill low areas with compacted sand or gravel.

44 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Variation: For loose-fill patios, install a layer of high-quality Add the first layer of compactable gravel (or start with landscape fabric to inhibit weed growth before adding the landscape fabric; see Variation this page). Dump wheelbarrow gravel base. Overlap rows of fabric by at least 6” . If desired, loads of gravel into evenly distributed pods, then spread out pin the fabric in place with U-shaped wire stakes. each pod in all directions with a shovel and a bow rake. Use the rake to create a flat, smooth surface.

Thoroughly tamp each layer of gravel before adding Extend a plumb bob from the layout strings to the base to more, as needed. If using a hand tamper, compact the gravel mark the exact corners and edges of the finished patio for in 2”-thick layers; if using a plate compactor, compact every the surface installation. Mark each point with paint or a small 4” of gravel. Use cross strings and the story pole to check stake. Find and mark the corners of the patio by hanging the gravel height as you work. A straight 2 x 4 also helps for the plumb bob from each string intersection. Proceed to the smoothing gravel prior to compacting and for checking for installation portion of your project. high and low spots.

                                                                                                                  Patio Projects •   45

IDrainage Swales Building a swale is relatively simple, but it involves the labor of digging a trench. We’ll show

I f your new patio area may potentially collect rainwater or is sloped in such a way that runoff water flows into unwanted places, you will need to improve you how to construct the swale using a shovel, but for larger swales, you’ll want to rent a trencher or backhoe. If you decide to use a trencher or backhoe, or redirect the drainage of the area. One effective way you’ll still need to use a shovel to create the V shape to do this is to create a swale. and to smooth the sides of the trench. A swale is a shallow ditch that carries water away from the yard to a designated collection area, usually a gutter, sewer catch bin, stream, or lake. Most communities restrict the redirecting of runoff water, so Tools & Materials ~ always contact your local inspector’s office to discuss your plans before you begin. Hammer or maul Landscape fabric If you’re building a swale between your house Wheelbarrow Rough gravel and the neighboring yard, talk to your neighbor about Spade Shovel the project before you begin. If drainage is a problem Sod cutter (optional) Work gloves in their yard as well, they may be willing to share the Stakes expense and the work of the project.

Improve drainage in a large low-lying area by creating a shallow ditch, called a drainage swale, to carry runoff water away. If your region receives frequent heavy rainfalls or if you have dense soil that drains poorly, you may need to lay a perforated drainpipe and a bed of gravel under the swale to make it more effective (see page 48).

46 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Build a Drainage Swale

After identifying the problem area, use stakes to mark a Dig a 6”-deep trench along the swale route. If you remove swale route that will direct water away from the site toward a the sod carefully, you can lay it back into the trench when the runoff area. The outlet of the swale should be lower than any swale is completed. other point in the problem area whenever possible.

Shape the trench so it slopes gradually downward toward Complete the swale by laying sod into the trench. Compress the outlet, and the sides and bottom are smooth. the sod, and then water the area thoroughly to check drainage.

                                                                                                               Patio Projects •   47

I Swale Options

For severe drainage problems. dig a 1-ft.-deep swale angled slightly downward to the outlet point. Line the swale with landscape fabric. Spread a 2”-layer of coarse gravel in the bottom of the swale, and then lay perforated drainpipe over the gravel . Cover the pipe with a 5” -layer of gravel, then wrap the landscape fabric over the top of the gravel. Cover the swale with soil and fresh sod. Set a splash block at the outlet to distribute the runoff and prevent erosion.

    Types of Gravel ~

                                                                         Smooth

    Gravel comes in two forms: rough and smooth. When buying gravel for shaping projects, such as drainage swales, select
    rough gravel. Rough gravel clings to the sides of the trench, creating an even drainage layer. Smooth gravel is typically used
    as a decorative ground cover. When used for shaping projects, it tends to slide toward the middle of the trench.

48 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Dry Wells D ownspouts and other house drainage systems are common obstacles for new patio projects. The problem is simple: the water needs a place Tools & Materials ~ to go. Sometimes downspouts can be extended or Hammer or maul Landscape fabric repositioned to clear the patio area, and natural Wheelbarrow Gravel drainage routes in your yard can be altered with a Spade Plastic trash can swale. But often the best solution is to capture the Mason’s string Perforated drain tile water and divert it to a dry well in your yard. Line level Large stones A dry well system typically consists of a buried Tape measure Catch basin drain tile running from a catch basin at the water Jigsaw Eye and ear source to a collection container some distance away. Drill and 1II bit protection A basic system is easy and inexpensive to install. In Stakes Work gloves the project shown here, a perforated plastic drain tile connects to a dry well fashioned from a plastic trash can that has been drilled with holes and then filled with stone rubble. Water can percolate into the soil as it makes its way along the drainpipe, while the well serves as a large collection area that drains excess water slowly into the surrounding earth.

                                                                                                                Catch
                                                                                                                basin

                                                                                              Gravel

C) Landscape • fabric Perforated drain tile

                                                Plastic trash can
                                                with 3/4" holes

                                            Large stones
                                            or rubble
                                        o

                                            o

     o
      Q

A dry well helps divert runoff water away from your patio and into the ground a distance from your home.

                                                                                                             Patio Projects •   49

I How to Install a Dry Well

Excavate a 10”-wide by 14”-deep Lay a 1”-layer of gravel on the bottom Place the can in the hole, run the trench along the planned route from of the trench. Place the drain tile in the drain tile 2” into the side of the can, the catch basin to the dry well. Line the trench. Trace the outline of the drain tile and fill the can with large rocks. Check hole and trench with landscape fabric. onto the trash can side, 3” from the top. the slope of the drain tile with a level, Fold the excess over the sides of the Cut a hole in the trash can along the adjusting the layer of gravel below, if trench and hole. outline using a jigsaw. Use a drill with a necessary. 1” bit to drill drainage holes through the sides and bottom of the can every 4 to 6”.

Connect the catch basin in the problem area. Position it so Fold the landscape fabric edges over the gravel and fill the the excess water will flow directly into it. Fill the trench with trench with the soil you removed earlier. Replace the sad in gravel, 1” over the drain tile. the trench area. Water the area thoroughly.

50 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Retaining Walls A sloPing yard often means limited space for a patio. And while a steeply sloping patio might seem like fun to the kids, it would be decidedly a professional. Retaining walls of any size may be governed by the local building code; contact your city’s building department to learn about construction inconvenient for dinner parties. The answer, then, specifications and permit requirements. is to build retaining walls. Retaining walls cut into a slope (and in some cases, replace the slope), bridging the upper and lower levels while adding more useable area to both. Tools & Materials ~ Low retaining walls can be built with a variety of materials, including landscape timbers and natural Excavation tools Compactable gravel stone. But by far the most popular material for do-it- Mason’s string Interlocking yourself projects is interlocking concrete block made Line level concrete block specifically for retaining walls. This block requires Tape measure Crushed stone no mortar-most types are simply stacked in ordered Hand tamper Perforated drainpipe rows-and it has flanges or pins that automatically set Plate compactor Construction the batter for the wall (the backward lean that most Circular saw with adhesive (and retaining walls have for added strength). Interlocking masonry blade caulk gun) block is available at home and garden centers and Maul Flour or marking landscape suppliers. Most blocks have roughly Chisel paint textured faces. You’ll need standard blocks, corner Level Eye and ear blocks, and cap stones. Stakes protection Due to the structural factors involved, the Professional-grade Work gloves recommended height limit for do-it-yourself retaining landscape fabric walls is three feet. Anything higher is best left to

 Shaping Your Site with Retaining Walls ~
 Shown here are two methods of reshaping the same            the original slope. Soil cut from the base of the hill is
 natural slope. In the top photo, the retaining wa ll is     reused as fill behind the top of the wal l. The result is
 placed at the bottom of the original slope. Extra soil is   a newly contro lled area for building a patio below the
 brought in to fill behind the wall, thus creating more      wa ll, as well as a modest gain of level ground above.
 level land on top. In the bottom photo, the wa ll divides

                                                                                                               Patio Projects •   51

I How to Build a Retaining Wall with Interlocking concrete Block

Interlocking wall blocks do not need mortar. Some types are held together with a Excavate the hillside, if necessary. system of overlapping flanges that automatically set the backward pitch (batter) as Allow 12” of space for the crushed the blocks are stacked, as shown in this project. other types of blocks use fiberglass stone backfill between the back of the pins (inset). wa ll and the hill side. Use stakes to mark the front edge of the wa ll. Connect the stakes with mason’s string and use a line level to check for leve l.

Dig out the bottom of the excavation below ground level Line the excavation with strips of landscape fabric cut 3 so it is 6” lower than the height of the block. For example, if ft. longer than the planned height of the wall. Make sure all you use 6”-thick block, dig down 12”. Measure down from the seams overlap by at least 6” . string to make sure the bottom base is level.

52 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Spread a 6”-layer of compactable gravel over the bottom of Lay the first course of block, aligning the front edges with the excavation as a subbase and pack it thoroughly. A rented the mason’s string. When using flanged block, place the first plate compactor works better than a hand tamper for packing course upside down and backward. Frequently check for the subbase. level and adjust, if necessary, by adding or removing subbase material below the blocks.

Lay the second course of block according to manufac- Make half-blocks for the corners and ends of a wall, and turer’s instructions, checking to make sure the blocks are level. use them to stagger vertical joints between courses. Score Lay flanged block with the flanges tight against the underlying full blocks with a circular saw and masonry blade, then break course. Add 3 to 4” of gravel behind the block, and pack it with the blocks along the scored line with a maul and chisel . Some a hand tamper. manufacturers make corner blocks available. (continued)

                                                                                                                 Patio Projects •   53

Add and tamp crushed stone, as needed, to create a slight Fill behind the wall with crushed stone and pack it downward pitch-about Va ” of height per foot of pipe-leading thoroughly with the hand tamper. Lay the remaining courses of to the drainpipe outlet. Place the drain pipe on the crushed block, except for the cap row. Backfill with crushed stone and stone, 6” behind the wall, with the perforations face down. pack with the tamper as you go. Make sure the pipe outlet is unobstructed. Lay courses of block until the wall is about 18” above ground level, staggering the vertical joints.

Before laying the cap block, fold the end of the landscape Apply construction adhesive to the top course of block, fabric over the crushed stone backfill. Add a layer of topsoil then lay the cap block. Follow the stone manufacturer’s over the fabric, and then pack it thoroughly with a hand instructions for adhesive use. Use topsoil to fill in behind the tamper. Trim off any excess landscape fabric. wall and to fill in the base at the front of the wall. Install sod or plants, as desired .

54 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Add a Curve to an Interlocking Block Retaining Wall

Outline the curve by first driving a stake at each end and Excavate for the wall section, following the curved layout then driving another stake at the point where lines extended line. To install the first course of landscape blocks, turn them from the first stakes would form a right angle. Tie a mason’s upside down and backwards and align them with the radius string to the right-angle stake, extended to match the distance curve. Use a level to ensure the blocks sit level and are to the other two stakes, establishing the radius of the curve. properly placed. Mark the curve by swinging flour or spray paint at the string end, like a compass.

Install subsequent courses so the overlapping flange sits flush against the back Use half blocks or cut blocks to create of the blocks in the course below. As you install each course, the radius will change finished ends on open ends of the wall. because of the backwards pitch of the wall, affecting the layout of the courses. Where necessary, trim blocks to size. Install using landscape construction adhesive, taking care to maintain the running-bond pattern.

                                                                                                                    Patio Projects •   55

                                                                                          ,.,

These convenient interlocking pavers are made with DIYers in mind. They are easy to install and often come with fully plotted patterns for simple design preparation and installation.

56 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Cobblestone Paver Patio C oncrete pavers have advanced by leaps and bounds from the monochromatic, cookie-cutter bricks and slabs associated with first-generation versions. pattern, the sales staff will be able to tell you how much stone in each size you’ll need to purchase. The patio in this project was created using The latest products feature subtle color blends that the following sizes and proportions of cobblestone lend themselves well to organic, irregular patterns. A concrete pavers: tumbling process during manufacturing can further “age” Field pavers-70 percent 6 X 9” cobble the pavers so they look more like natural cobblestones. rectangles, 30 percent 6 X 6” cobble squares The technological advances in the casting and finishing Border pavers-3 X 6” cobble rectangles processes have become so sophisticated that a well- selected concrete paver patio could look as suitable in a traditional European square as in a suburban back yard. When choosing pavers for a patio, pick a style Tools & Materials ~ and blend of shapes and sizes that complements your landscape. Use the materials used on your house’s Excavation tools Masonry saw exterior and other stone or masonry in your yard to Wheelbarrow Push broom inform your decisions on colors and shade. Be aware 4-ft. level Concrete pavers that some paver styles require set purchase amounts, Hand maul Compactable gravel and it’s not always possible to return partially used Wood stakes Coarse sand pallets of material, so order carefully. Chalk line Plastic edging and In this project, we lay a cobblestone patio that uses Mason’s string spikes three sizes of pavers (see page 58). Such pavers may be Line level Joint sand purchased by a fraction of a pallet, or band, minimizing Square-nose spade Eye and ear leftovers. We’ve also included a row of edge pavers l”-dia. metal pipes protection to create a pleasing border around the patio. When 2 x 4 lumber Work gloves shopping for your own patio materials, bring a drawing Scrap plywood Tape measure of your patio plans with exact measurements to your Plate compactor Shovel stone yard or landscape supplier. Based on your chosen

 Cobblestones ~
 Today, the word "cobblestone"
 more often refers to cast
 concrete masonry units that
 mimic the look of natural
 cobblestones. Although they are
 tumbled to give them a slightly
 aged appearance, cast concrete
 cobbles are more uniform in
 shape, size, and color. This is an
 advantage when it comes to
 installation, but purists object to
 the appearance.

                                                                                                       Patio Projects •   57

Cobblestone Paver Patio-Construction Details

                                                   ~UI
                                    IU
                         ~
                         ~

                                                                                                             li
                      ~~              ~-                                                             ~ T -
                                                                                               .'
                      --- .......     i...-I   _

       90' Basketweave pattern
                                                                                                     ~ \:'"       6 x 6"
                                                                                                     \
                                                                                                    6 x 9"

         Paver edge                   Cobbles                           Jointing sand                                      Backfill

                 \

                                                                                        Dirt

             Landscape              Sand           Compactable grovel
             spike                  1"             4"

58 • COMPLETE GU lDE TO PATI OS & WALKWAYS

I How to Build a Cobblestone Paver Patio

Mark the corners of the finished patio with stakes, and Variation: Use batterboards and mason’s strings to establish remove any sod or other plantings in the area. Set up grade the layout of the project area. See pages 40 to 45 for detailed stakes and mason’s strings to guide the excavation and instructions. establish a downward slope of Vs” per foot away from the house foundation.

Excavate the site to a depth that accommodates a 4” gravel Add compactable gravel for a 4”-thick layer after subbase, a 1” layer of sand, and the thickness of the pavers compaction. Screed the gravel flat with a straight 2 x 4 and (minus the desired height above the ground). Extend the use a level or the layout strings to make sure the surface is excavation 6” beyond the patio footprint. Use the layout strings properly sloped. Compact the gravel thoroughly with a plate or grade stakes to check the depth and slope as you work. compactor. Tamp the soil with a plate compactor.

                                                                                                                     (continued)

                                                                                                                 Patio Projects •   59

                                                                                                                    Paver edge
                                                                                                                       spikes

Set up a new string layout to guide the edging installation Install rigid paver edging along one side edge of the patio: using stakes and mason’s string. The strings should snap a chalk line directly under the layout string along the represent the inside edges of the edging material. To make edge, and then remove that string. Set the edging to the line sure the layout has square corners, measure diagonally and secure it with paver edge spikes, driving in the spikes only between the corners: the layout is square when the partially (in case you have to make adjustments later). measurements are equal. See pages 40 to 45.

Lay lengths of 1”-dia. metal pipe in the project area to serve as screed guides. Fill the patio area with coarse building sand to the tops of the pipes. Screed the sand smooth and flat using a long, straight 2 x 4, pulling the board back and forth with a sawing motion. Remove the pipes, fill the voids with sand, and smooth the surface flat. Tip: Dampen the sand before screeding.

60 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

                                                                                                                      .,.    .   .;. -
                                                                                                                       Perp'endicular
                                                                                                                       to bond line

                                                                   "Strings karta":Berie 'eqUal in
                                                                    length tp c.~eate right angles ,
                                                                         .
                                                                    . .. ."".'.~ ~
                                                                      ."

Set the pavers in the chosen pattern, starting at the 90° Option: Use additional layout strings to help guide the paver corner formed by the patio edging and an adjacent layout pattern. Set up a string that is perpendicular to the bond line, string (called the bond line). Lay border pavers along one or using it to align courses every few feet. Tie equidistant strings both edges before setting the field pavers. For now, simply lay between the corners and the end of the perpendicular string to the pavers in place; later, you will bed them into the sand with assure a right angle with the bond line. the plate vibrator.

Install the remaining pieces of edging as you near the Cut pavers to fit as needed to complete the paving using opposite side and end of the patio, leaving enough room for a rented masonry saw (also see Making Curves on page 62). the final course of field pavers (plus border units, if applicable). It’s preferable to cut pavers a little too small than to have very Cut away the edges of the sand bed so the edging rests on the tight fits; the joint sand will fill small gaps. With the paving gravel base only. Tip: If you don’t need to cut pavers along the complete, drive the edging stakes into the rigid edging to lock edges, you can install the edging after all of the pavers are laid. the pavers in place. (continued)

                                                                                                                            Patio Projects •   61

                                                                 Making Curves ~
                                                                 At rounded corners and curves, install border pavers
                                                                 (A) in a fan pattern with even gaps between the
                                                                 pavers. Gentle curves may accommodate full-sized
                                                                 border pavers, but for sharper turns you usually need
                                                                 to cut tapers into the paver edges so you don't end
                                                                 up with wide gaps at the outside. When using border
                                                                 pavers in a curved layout, the field pave rs will need to
                                                                 be trimmed to fit the odd spaces created where the
                                                                 field and borders intersect (8).

Sweep joint sand over the pavers using a push broom. Continue adding sand and sweeping until the joints between pavers are nearly filled to the top surface.

Tamp the patio surface with the plate compactor. Move the compactor in circular motions, working from the outside in and overlapping rings as you go. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until the joints are completely filled after compaction. Note: Some paver manufacturers recommend sweeping excess sand from the pavers before compacting.

62 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Choosing Pavers & Patterns ~ The number of purchasing options available when you shop for pavers makes it possible to create just about any patio layout pattern you can imagine. There is nothing stopping you from going wild and creating a layout that’s truly one-of-a-kind. Most landscape centers will also work II with you to create a layout for your patio that employs tested design ideas and uses pavers in a very efficient manner and with as little cutting as possible. Another option for DIY designers is to visit the website of the paver manufacturer (you should be able to get the information from your paver dealer). Many of these have applications where you can choose a basic style you like (such as the patterns shown here) and enter the size of your planned patio. You’ll receive a printout of what the pattern should look like, along with a shopping list for the materials you’ll need, all the way down to sand and spikes A traditional brick running-bond pattern can be for your paver edging. created using rectangular pavers.

This basketweave pattern is made with squares and Cobblestone paving with squares and large and small large rectangles. A border of small rectangles completes rectangles create this circular pattern . the design.

                                                                                                       Patio Projects •   63

I Circular Paver Patio Tools & Materials ~ Circular saw Marking paint 2Y2 II drywall screws C oncrete pavers are available in a range of sizes and shapes, making it easy to create distinctive patterns without a lot of cuts. This circular patio Hammer Drill Excavation tools Compactable gravel Landscape fabric is made with a complete set of shaped concrete Mason’s string 1 or 1 W’ pipe pavers. To create a perfect circle, all you have to Line level Straight 2 x 4 do is set the pavers following the manufacturer’s Plate compactor Washed concrete installation diagram, and no cuts are needed (although Trowel sand some sets have center pieces that must be cut Flathead screwdriver Scrap plywood before installation). Shovel Plastic patio edging Circular paver sets are commonly sold in fixed Push broom Paver joint sand starter sizes, and you can add units as needed to enlarge Circular paver units Eye and ear the circle. You may have to purchase additional pavers 16d nails protection as complete sets or in full-pallet quantities and use only Duct tape Work gloves what you need. Circular pavers are ideal for building Lumber (2 x 2, 2 x 4) Tape measure freestanding patios because their shape makes for a nice decorative feature.

A circular patio is visually dynamic and its shape makes it uniquely suited to intimate outdoor dining and entertaining spaces. When shopping for pavers, ask about color and texture options. Some suppliers may allow you to mix and match finishes for a personalized look.

64 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

 As a design feature, a circle naturally draws the   would be far more difficult than sandsetting,

eye toward its center. This makes a circular patio due to the irregularity of the paver joints. For the the perfect setting for a round patio table and chairs sandset process, it’s easiest to lay the pavers first, or for highlighting a central decorative feature, and then install flexible plastic edging around the such as a fountain or statuary. A circle is also the perimeter to lock the units in place. If your patio best configuration for creating an intimate seating plan calls for numerous cuts, rent a masonry saw, area surrounding a fire pit. In addition to patio or tub saw, for making the cuts. Otherwise, you can spaces, small circles can be used as landing areas make a few cuts with a circular saw fitted with a along a curving paver walkway, while an open ring masonry blade. Before you get started , it will help of circular pavers can be used as a border around a to review the detailed information on laying out planting bed. the project site and preparing the gravel base (see The patio in this project follows a standard pages 40 to 45). sandset installation. Mortaring a patio like this

Circular Paver Materials ~
                                                                                                  LEGEND
            Rectangle                                                                            = Center Piece

       Large                                                                            \J       = Small Radius
       radius
                                                                                         o       = Large Radius
Flexible
plastic
edging
                                                                                         o       = Rectangle

                                                                                             PALLET LAYOUT

                                                                                                     ro
                                                                                                     01
                                                                                                     .        r- r-

                                                                                            *as arranged on our
                                                                                            paillet delivered by
                                                                                           stoneyard
                                                                                 Most circular paver patios are
                                                                                made up of a few different paver
                                                                               shapes. The paver manufacturer
                                                                             should supply a detailed drawing
                                                                           showing the paver layout for each ring
                                                                        of the patio. Typically, the joints between
                                                                    pavers are offset with those of neighboring
                                                                rings. If the pavers have mixed coloring, plan the
                pieces                                      layout carefully for the desired decorative effect.

                                                                                       Combine paver sets
                                                                                       to create intersecting
                                                                                       circular patio sections
                                                                                       for custom shaping and
                                                                                       sizing. Consult the paver
                                                                                       distributor to learn about
                         Fan-shaped pavers offer                                       altering standard circular
                         an eye-catching twist on                                      layouts.
                         circular patio designs.

                                                                                                         Patio Projects •   65

I How to Install a Circular Paver Patio

Create a center pivot for defining the patio layout. Mark the ground for excavation. Measuring out from the Drive a stake at the exact center of the desired location for nail, mark the board at a distance equal to the radius, plus 6”. the finished patio. Cut a straight 2 x 2 about 12” longer than the Tape a can of marking paint to the board so the spray nozzle is radius of the patio. Drill a large pilot hole at one end of the centered on the mark (inset). Spray a continuous line onto the board, and fasten the board to the center of the stake with a ground while pivoting the board to create a complete circle. single nail. Note: For large patio areas, use a string tied to a Set up batterboards and leveled layout strings in a square center nail instead of a board (inset). that’s about 1 ft. larger than the excavated area. Remove all sod and other vegetation inside the marked circle.

Measure diagonally between opposing corners and Excavate the site to the depth recommended by the paver adjust the strings as needed until the measurements are equal manufacturer. Make sure the soil is smooth, well compacted, (the layout is square). Slope two of the parallel layout strings and properly sloped to Va ” per foot. at %” per foot using the distance between the batterboards to calculate the drop distance generally dropping away from your house.

66 • C OMPLETE G UlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Prepare the subbase with a 4” layer Check the depth with cross strings Install landscape fabric over the of gravel. Thoroughly compact the and a story pole as you work (shown). gravel subbase. Overlap the edges of gravel with a plate compactor. The completed base must be smooth fabric strips by 6”. Trim the fabric as and flat and follow the slope setting. needed, leaving the ends a little long for now. Note: This helps keep the sand base in place longer.

Set two lengths of 1”-dia. pipe on top of the landscape Use a straight 2 x 4 to screed the sand level with the fabric so that one piece spans the full diameter of the gravel pipes. Move the short pipe to the opposite side of the site to base and the other spans across the base about % of the way complete the other half of the sand layer. Remove the pipes in from the side of the circle. Align the pipes parallel to each and then fill all depressions with sand. Tip: Moisten sand prior other. Fill half of the patio site with sand even with the tops of to screeding. the pipes. (continued)

                                                                                                                    Patio Projects •   67

Position the center paver, then measure out to the edge Set the first ring of pavers around the center paver. Check of the site in several places to confirm that it is centered . Tip: their positions carefully, and make sure the spacing lugs are Work on top of a piece of plywood to avoid disturbing the oriented correctly. If the pave rs don’t have lugs, gap them sand bed. according to the manufacturer’s specifications. Note: 00 not hammer or tamp the pavers into the sand bed unless the manufacturer directs otherwise.

Set the remaining pavers, completing each ring according Install rigid paver edging along the patio’s perimeter. Set to your layout diagram. Be sure to offset the pave r joints the edging on top of the gravel subbase but not the sand bed. between rows. The pavers may be labeled, requiring them to Tip: Dampening the sand bed along the patio edge makes it be installed in a specific order as you work around the circle. easy to cut the sand away cleanly with a trowel before setting After a sizable area is laid, work from your plywood platform the edging. set atop the pavers.

68 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

14

Inspect the paving to make sure all joints are aligned Shovel joint sand over the entire patio surface, then use a properly and all gaps are consistent. Make minor adjustments push broom to sweep the sand over the pavers to fill the joints. to pavers as needed using a flathead screwdriver as a pry bar. Repeat as needed until the joints are completely filled, then Be careful not to mar the paver edges as you pry. sweep off excess sand.

Set the pavers into the sand bed using a plate compactor. Refill the joints with sand a final time and sweep the Make a first pass along the perimeter of the patio, then surface clean. Spray thoroughly with water to settle the compact the interior with parallel back-and-forth passes, joint sand. overlapping the preceding pass slightly as you go. Note: Avoid excessive tamping to prevent damage to the paver surfaces. Add another application of sand. Tamp the surface, but make the interior passes perpendicular to those of the first tamping runs.

                                                                                                                 Patio Projects •   69

IMortared Paver Patio

S etting brick or concrete pavers into mortar is one of the most beautiful-and permanent-ways to dress up an old concrete slab patio. The paving style harsh winters call for the hardiest pavers available, graded SW or SX for severe weather. Also make sure the mortar you use is compatible with the pavers to used most often for mortared pavers is the standard minimize the risk of cracking and other problems. running bond pattern, that is also the easiest pattern to install. Mortared pavers are appropriate for old concrete Tools & Materials ~ slabs that are flat, structurally sound, and relatively free of cracks. Minor surface flaws are generally Stiff brush or broom % or Yi ” plywood acceptable, however existing slabs with significant Rented masonry saw Spray bottle cracks or any evidence of shifting or other structural Mason’s trowel Isolation board problems will most likely pass on those same flaws Mortar mixing tools Mortar to the paver finish. When in doubt, have your slab 4-ft. level Burlap assessed by a qualified mason or concrete contractor Rubber mallet Plastic sheeting to learn about your options. Mortar bag Notched board Pavers for mortaring include natural clay brick Jointing tool Mason’s string units in both standard thickness (2%”) and thinner Pointing trowel Straight 2 x 4 versions (1 Yi ”) and concrete pavers in various shapes Concrete cleaner or Eye and ear and sizes. Any type you choose should be square-edged, pressure washer protection to simplify the application and finishing of the mortar Brick or concrete Push broom joints. When shopping for pavers, discuss your project pavers Work gloves with an expert masonry supplier. Areas that experience

Nothing dresses up an old concrete patio like mortared pavers. The mortaring process takes more time and effort than many finishing techniques, but the look is timeless; and the surface is extremely durable.

70 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Install a Mortared Paver Patio

Prepare the patio surface for mortar by thoroughly cleaning Mist the concrete with water to prevent premature drying the concrete with a commercial concrete cleaner and/or a of the mortar bed, and then mix a batch of mortar as directed pressure washer. Make sure the surface is completely free of by the manufacturer. Tip: Install isolation board along the dirt. grease, oil, and waxy residue. foundation wall if the paving abuts the house; this prevents the mortar from bonding with the foundation.

Dry-lay the border pavers along the edge of the patio slab. Begin laying the border pavers by spreading a %“-thick Gap the pavers to simulate the mortar joints using spacers cut layer of mortar for three or four pavers along one edge of the from plywood equal to the joint thickness (% or %” is typical). patio using a mason’s trowel. Lay the first few pavers, buttering Adjust the pavers as needed to create a pleasing layout with the leading edge of each with enough mortar to create the the fewest cuts possible. Mark the paver locations on the slab desired joint thickness. Press or tap each paver in place to and then set pavers aside. slightly compress the mortar bed. If necessary, cut bricks with a rented masonry saw.

                                                                                                                    (continued)

                                                                                                                Patio Projects •   71

Remove excess mortar from the tops and sides of the Option: To conceal the edges of a raised slab, build wood pavers. Use a level to make sure the pavers are even across forms similar to concrete forms (see page 153). Set a the tops, and check the mortar joints for uniform thickness. gap between the forms and slab equal to the paver thickness Tool the joints with a jointer as you go. Repeat the process to plus ‘12” . lay the remaining border pave rs. Allow mortar to dry.

Dry lay the field pavers without buttering them. Use the Spread and then screed mortar for the field pavers. plywood spacers to set the gaps for mortar joints. Cut end Trowel on a V/ -thick layer of mortar inside the border, covering pavers as needed with a rented masonry saw. Tip: Keep the only about 3 or 4 sq. ft. to allow for working time before the courses straight by setting the pavers along a string line mortar sets. Screed the mortar to a uniform ‘12” thickness using referenced from the border pavers. Remove dry-laid pavers. a notched board set atop the border pavers (set the interior end on a lumber spacer, as needed).

72 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

As you work, check the heights of the pavers with a level Fill the paver joints with fresh mortar using a mortar bag or a straight 2 x 4 to make sure all units are level with one to keep the paver faces clean. Within each working section, another. If a paver is too high, press it down or tap it with a fill the long joints between courses first, and then do the short rubber mallet; if too low, lift it out and butter its back face with joints between the paver ends. Overfill the joints slightly. mortar and reset it. Repeat steps 6 through 8 to complete the paver installation, and then let the mortar bed dry.

Tool the joints with a jointing tool-again, complete the let the mortar joints dry for a few hours, and then scrub long joints first and then fill the next section . As the mortar the pavers with a wet burlap rag to remove excess mortar and begins to set (turns from glossy wet to flat gray) in each tooled any other residue. Cover the surface with plastic for 48 hours. section, scrape off excess mortar with a pointing trowel, being Remove the plastic, and let the surface cure undisturbed for careful not to smear mortar onto the pavers. one week before using the patio.

                                                                                                                      Patio Projects •   73

Sandset flagstone patios blend nicely with natural landscapes. Although flagstone evokes a natural feel, the patio can appear rustic or formal. This patio has clean, well-tamped joints and straight, groomed edges along the perimeter that lends to a formal feel. Plantings in the joints or a rough, natural perimeter would give the same patio a more relaxed, rustic feel.

74 • COM PLETE GU IDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Sandset Flagstone Patio F lagstones make a great, long-lasting patio surface with a naturally rough texture and a perfectly imperfect look and finish. Randomly shaped stones The following project includes steps for building a classic flagstone patio. You’ll also find instructions for building low dry stone walls, the ultimate add- are especially suited to patios with curved borders, on to a stone patio surface. If you’re new to working but they can also be cut to form straight lines. Your with natural stone, see pages 82 to 83 for some basic patio will appear more at home in your landscape cutting tips. if the flagstones you choose are of the same stone species as other stones in the area. For example, if your gravel paths and walls are made from a local buff limestone, look for the same material in Tools & Materials ~ limestone flags. Mason’s string Stiff-bristle brush Flagstones usually come in large slabs, sold Line level Circular saw with as flagstone, or in smaller pieces (typically 16” or Rope or hose masonry blade smaller), sold as steppers. You can make a patio out Excavation tools Plugs or seeds for of either. Larger stones will make a solid patio with Spud bar groundcover a more even surface, but the bigger ones can require Broom Eye and ear three strong people to position, and large stones are Stakes protection hard to cut and fit tightly. If your soil drains well and Marking paint Work gloves is stable, flagstones can be laid on nothing more than I” (outside W’ pl)’“,ood a layer of sand. However, if you have unstable clay diameter) pipe 3 Yz” deck screws soil that becomes soft when wet, start with a 4”-thick Coarse sand Pointing chisel foundation of compactable gravel (see pages 40 to 45) Straight 2 x 4 Pitching chisel under your sand. Flagstone Stone chisel There are a few different options for filling the Spray bottle Hand maul spaces between flagstones. One popular treatment is Stone edging Dust mask to plant them with low-growing perennials suited to Sand-based soil or Chalk or a crayon crevice culture . For best results, use sand-based soil joint sand Square-nose spade between flagstones when planting. Also, stick to very Lumber (2 x 2, Crushed stone small plants that can withstand foot traffic. If you prefer 2 x 4) Ashlar not to have a planted patio, simply fill the joints with Drill Mortar sand or fine gravel-just be sure to add landscape fabric Mason’s trowel Capstones under your sand base to discourage weed growth.

 Adding a Stone Wall ~
 A dry stone wal l is a simple,
 beautiful addition to a flagstone
 patio. A wa ll functions as extra
 seating, a place to set plants,
 or extra countertop or tabletop
 space. It also provides visual
 definition to your outdoor space.
 See page 80 for how to build a
 stone wa ll.

                                                                                                        Patio Projects •   75

Construction Details

                  1"

                                                                       Lay flagstones so their tops are approximately
                                                                       V2 to 1" above the surrounding ground. Because
                                                                       natural stones are not uniform in thickness, you
                                                                       will need to adjust sand or dirt beneath each
   L.-_ _~=-=--=-':;';:"';:":':"":':':"":"'=-=--=''':;;':'''-=-=~~---l flagstone, as needed.

                                                                                                        Gaps filled with sand-based
                                                                                                        soil, sand, or grovel

                                                                                                               Optional compacted
                        Backfill with sand                                                                     gravel: 410 6' (10 10 15 em)

   A typical sandset patio has a layer of coarse sand for embedding the flagstones. A subbase of compactable gravel is
   an option for improved stability and drainage. The joints between stones can be filled with sand, gravel, or soil and plants.
   Edging material is optional.

                                                                                    --
                                                                                                                         Flagstones that are
                                                                                                                         cut into rectangular
                                               Irregular flagstones
                                               look natural and are
                                               easy to work with in
                                               round layouts.
                                                                                              0                          shapes can be laid in
                                                                                                                         square or rectangular
                                                                                                                         patterns with
                                                                                                                         uniform gaps.

76 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Build a Sandset Flagstone Patio

Outline the patio base using string and stakes for straight Set up layout strings to guide the excavation using stakes or lines and/or a rope or hose for curves. The base should extend batterboards (see pages 40 to 45 for detailed steps on layout at least 2 to 4” beyond the edges of the flagstones, except and site preparation) . Excavate the base to a depth of 2” + the where the patio will butt up to a wall. Transfer the outline to stone thickness plus V2 to 1”. Slope the ground away from the the ground with marking paint. Remove any sod and vegetation house foundation at a rate of V/ per foot. within the base area .

Lay sections of 1” pipe across the project area to serve Fill the site with coarse sand slightly above the screed as screed gauges. These allow you to strike off sand at a gauges. With a helper, drag a straight 2 x 4 across the screed consistent depth when you drag a screed board over them. gauges to level off the sand. Use a screed board that’s long Note: Since large flagstones can be held in place adequately enough so that you can avoid stepping in the sand. Work the by the surrounding soil, edging for the patio is optional; it often screed in a back-and-forth sawing motion. Remove the pipes looks best to allow neighboring groundcover to grow up to the once each section is finished, fill in the voids and smooth the edges of the stones. If you do plan to use edging, install it now. surface flat.

                                                                                                                        (continued)

                                                                                                                    Patio Projects •   77

Arrange your flagstones into groups according to size and Begin by laying large, thick stones around the perimeter shape. As a general rule, start paving with the broadest stones of the patio. Leave a consistent gap of about 1” between and fill in around them with increasingly smaller pieces, but stones by matching pieces like a puzzle and cutting and appearance and sight lines are also important: if there is one dressing stones as needed (see pages 82 to 83). The outer nice stone with a flat surface and good color, feature it in the edge of the patio should form smooth curves (or straight lines) center of the patio. Or, if some of the patio will be visible from without jutting pieces or abrupt irregularities. Level stones as the house, choose nicer stones for these areas. needed by prying up with a spud bar and adding or removing sand underneath .

Fill in around the larger stones with smaller pieces cut to Fill the joints between stones with sand-based, weed- fit the spaces, as needed, working from the outside in. After seed-free soil (see page 79). Sweep the soil across the patio setting a band of stones a few courses wide, lay a 2 x 4 across surface to fill the cracks, and then water the soil so it settles. the stones to make sure they’re level with one another. Add Repeat as needed until the soil reaches the desired level. or remove sand below to adjust their height, and dampen the Plant plugs or seeds for groundcover to grow up between the sand occasionally to make it easier to work with. stones, if desired.

78 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Variation: To finish the patio with sand instead of soil and plants, spread sand over the patio and sweep across the stones with a push broom to fill the joints. Pack the sand with your fingers or a piece of wood. Spray the entire area with water to help compact the sand. Let the patio dry. Repeat filling and spraying until the joints are full and the stones are securely locked in place.

Choosing Soil & Plants for Your Patio ~
Sand-based soil (also called "patio planting" soil)
is the best material to use for planting between
flagstones. This mixture of soil and sand sweeps
easily into joints, and it resists tight compaction to
promote healthy plant growth, as well as surface
drainage. Regular soil can become too compacted
for effective planting and drainage and soil from
your yard will undoubtedly contain weeds. Sand-
based soil is available in bulk or by the bag and is
often custom-mixed at most large garden centers.
      As for the best plants to use, listed below
are a few species that tend to do well in a patio
application. Ask a local supplier what works best
for your climate.

•    Alyssum                  •    Saxifrage
•    Rock cress               •    Sedum
•    Thrift                   •    Thymus
•    Miniature dianthus       •    Scotch moss
                                                         Patio "planting soil" (for planting between stones) is available
•    candytuft                •    Irish moss
                                                         in bulk or bags at most garden centers. It is good for filling
•    Lobelia                  •    Woolly thyme          cracks because the sand base makes it dry and smooth enough
•    Forget-me-not            •    Mock strawberry       to sweep into cracks, yet the black compost will support plant
                                                         growth. Because it is bagged, you can be assured it doesn't come
                                                         with weeds.

                                                                                                                  Patio Projects •   79

I Building a Dry stone Patio Wall Stone walls are beautiful, long-lasting structures M mortar-necessary for bonding the capstones to the that are surprisingly easy to build, provided you plan top of the wall. carefully. A low stone wall can be constructed without Building dry stone walls requires patience and mortar, using a centuries-old method known as dry a fair amount of physical effort. The stones must be laying. With this technique, the wall is actually formed sorted by size and shape. You’ll probably also need to by two separate stacks that lean together slightly. The shape some of the stones to achieve consistent spacing position and weight of the two stacks support each and a general appearance that appeals to you. other, forming a single, sturdy wall. A dry stone wall It’s easiest to build a dry stone wall with ashlar- can be built to any length, but its width must be at stone that has been split into roughly rectangular least half of its height. blocks. Ashlar stone is stacked in the same running You can purchase stone for this project from bond pattern used in brick wall construction; each a quarry or stone supplier, where different sizes, stone overlaps a joint in the underlying course. This shapes, and colors of stone are sold, priced by the technique prevents long vertical joints, that weaken ton. The quarry or stone center can also sell you type the structure and detract from its appearance .

A low dry stone wall is the perfect complement for a flagstone patio. Walls can enclose one or more sides of the patio or even provide seating along the perimeter. For comfortable seating, build your wall 16 to 18” tall and top it with smooth capstones for a flat, clean finish. In most cases, it’s easiest to build walls before laying the patio surface.

80 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Build a Dry stone Wall

Layout the wall site, using stakes Select appropriate stones and lay Lay the next course, staggering the and mason’s string. Dig a 6”-deep the first course. Place pairs of stones joints. Use pairs of stones of varying trench that extends 6” beyond the side by side, flush with the edges of the lengths to offset the center joint. wall on all sides. Add a 4” crushed trench and sloping toward the center. Alternate stone length, and keep stone subbase to the trench, creating Use stones of similar height; position the height even, stacking pairs of a “V” shape by sloping the subbase uneven sides face down. Fill any gaps thin stones if necessary to maintain so the center is about 2” deeper than between the shaping stones with small consistent height. Place filler stones in the edges. filler stones. the gaps.

Every other course, place a tie stone every 3 ft. You Mortar the capstones to the top of the wall, keeping the may need to split the tie stones to length. Check the wall mortar at least 6” from the edges so it’s not visible. Push the periodically for level. capstones together and mortar the cracks in between . Brush off dried excess mortar with a stiff-bristle brush. Add patio, if desired (see page 75).

                                                                                                                     Patio Projects •   81

      Cutting Stone ~
 You can cut most stone by placing it directly on a bed of flat,      For basic cuts and cleaning up stone faces (called dressing), the
 soft ground, such as grass or sand, that will absorb some of the     best tools are a pointing chisel, a pitching chisel, a basic stone
 shock when the maul strikes the chisel. If you plan to do a lot of   chisel, and a hand maul. A circular saw also comes in handy
 cutting or splitting, construct a banker, a simple sand-bed table    for when you need a very straight edge or to help reduce the
 that provides a sturdy, shock-absorbent work surface (shown          work of scoring many stones with a chisel. Always wear eye
 at right).                                                           protection when cutting or dressing stone.

                                                                                           TO build a banker for cutting stone,
                                                                                           construct two square frames out of
                                                                                           2 x 2s, and sandwich a matching piece
                                                                                           of 3/4" plywood between the frames. Fasten
                                                                                           the pieces together with 3%" deck screws
                                                                                           driven through both sides. Fill one side
                                                                                           of the banker with sand to complete the
                                                                                           work surface.

 I Cutting stone with a Circular Saw
                                                                                                A circular saw lets you precut
                                                                                                stones with broad surfaces with
                                                                                                greater control and accuracy than
                                                                                                most people can achieve with a
                                                                                                chisel. It's a noisy tool, so wear
                                                                                                earplugs, along with a dust mask
                                                                                                and safety goggles. Install a toothless
                                                                                                masonry blade on your saw and start
                                                                                                out with the blade set to cut 'Is" deep.
                                                                                                (Make sure the blade is designed for
                                                                                                the material you're cutting. Some
                                                                                                masonry blades are designed for hard
                                                                                                materials like concrete, marble, and
                                                                                                granite. others are for soft materials,
                                                                                                like concrete block, brick, flagstone,
                                                                                                and limestone.) Wet the stone before
                                                                                                cutting to help control dust, then
                                                                                                make three passes, setting the blade
                                                                                                'Is " deeper with each pass. Repeat
                                                                                                the process on the other side. A thin
                                                                                                piece of wood under the saw protects
                                                                                                the saw foot from rough masonry
                                                                                                surfaces. Remember: always use a
                                                                                                GFCI outlet or extension cord when
                                                                                                using power tools outdoors.

82 COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to cut Flagstone

Mark the stone for cutting on both Score along the cut line on the Break the stone to complete the cut: sides using chalk or a crayon. If there is backside of the stone (the side that first, turn the stone over and rest it on a fissure nearby, mark your line there, won’t be exposed) by moving a stone a metal pipe or a 2 x 4 so the scored since the stone will likely break there chisel along the line and striking it with edge is directly over the support. Then, naturally. Note: To prevent unpredicted moderate blows with a maul. As an strike forcefully near the end of the breaks when cutting off large pieces, alternative, you can do this step with a waste portion to break the stone along plan to chip off small sections at a time. circular saw. the cut line.

I Dressing stones for Walls

Laying stones works best when the sides (including “Dress” a stone using a pointing chisel and maul to remove the top and bottom) are roughly square. If a side is sharply jagged edges or undesirable bumps. Position the chisel at a skewed, score and split it with a pitching chisel, and chip 30 to 45° angle at the base of the piece to be removed. Tap off smaller peaks with a pointing chisel or mason’s hammer. lightly all around the break line, then more forcefully, to chip Remember: a stone should sit flat on its bottom or top side off the piece. Position the chisel carefully before each blow without much rocking. with the maul.

                                                                                                                   Patio Projects   83

IMortared Flagstone Patio ith its permanent, solid finish, mortared W flagstone provides a more formal patio setting Tools & Materials ~ than sandset stone. It also has a cleaner feel, because there’s no sand to get kicked up out of the joints. Paint roller Concrete bonding Yet the mortared application offers the same organic Stone chisel agent appeal and dramatic lines of any natural flagstone Maul Mortar surface. You can achieve an even more formal look Circular saw with Flagstone with cut flagstone installed in a grid layout. masonry blade Stone sealer The proper base for mortaring flagstone is a Mortar box or (optional) structurally sound concrete slab. If you’re covering an wheelbarrow Eye and ear old concrete patio, inspect the slab for signs of structural Masonry hoe protection problems. Wide cracks and uneven surfaces indicate Mason’s trowel Work gloves shifting soil or an insufficient subbase. This movement Concrete float Concrete cleaning most likely will continue, leading to cracks in your new Rubber mallet supplies stone surface. You should remove the old slab and pour a 4-ft. level Chalk new one or consider sand-setting the stone over the slab. Straight 2 x 4 Tape measure One of the nice things about mortaring stone over Grout bag Acrylic fortifier concrete is that you don’t need edging to contain the Stiff-bristle brush Loose gravel and stones. This gives you the option of leaving the edges Sponge or coarse rag small rocks rough to enhance the natural look, or you can hang the Jointing tool outer stones over the edges of the slab to conceal the Whiskbroom concrete below.

The flagstone patio is a classic element of modern landscape design. Bluestone (above) is one of the most popular types, but may not be available in all areas since specific types vary by region.

84 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Build a Mortared Flagstone Patio

Thoroughly clean the concrete slab. While the slab doesn’t Once the bonding agent has set up per the manufacturer’s need to be in perfect condition, it does need to be sound. recommendations, dry-lay stones on the patio to determine Repair large cracks or holes. After repairs have cured, apply an appealing layout. Work from the center outward and evenly a latex bonding agent to the patio surface, following the distribute large stones and smaller ones, with 1/2 to 1” joints manufacturer’s instructions. between them.

                                                                 4

Cut stones to size as needed: mark the cutting lines with Variation: For a more rustic appearance, allow stones to chalk, then cut the stones with a stone chisel (or circular saw) overhang the edges of the slab. Stones thicker in size can and maul (see pages 82 to 83 for tips on cutting stone). overhang as much as 6”, provided that the slab supports at least two-thirds of the stone. Thinner stones should not overhang more than 3”. After stones are mortared in place, fill in beneath the overhanging stones with soil.

                                                                                                                     (continued)

                                                                                                                 Patio Projects •   85

   5
          ..

Mix a stiff batch ofType N or S mortar, following the Firmly press the first large stone into the mortar, in its manufacturer’s directions. Starting near the center of the same position as in the layout. Tap the stone with a rubber patio, set aside some of the stone, maintaining the layout mallet or the handle of the trowel to set it. Use a 4-ft. level pattern. Spread a 2”-thick layer of mortar onto the slab using and a scrap 2 x 4 to check for level; make any necessary a concrete float. adjustments.

Using the first stone as a reference for the course height, Check for level often as you work, using a straight length of continue to lay stones in mortar, working from the center of 2 x 4 and the 4-ft. level. Tap stones to make minor adjustments. the slab to the edges. Maintain V2to 1” joints. Once you’re done, let the mortar set up for a day or two before walking on it or grouting.

86 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Use a grout bag to fill the joints with mortar (add acrylic Once the mortar is stiff enough that your thumb leaves fortifier to the mix to make the mortar more elastic). Do not an impression without mortar sticking to it, rake the joints just overfill the joints. Pack loose gravel and small rocks into gaps enough so the mortar is even with the surface of the stone, so first to conserve mortar and make stronger joints. Wipe up water cannot pool. Use a whisk broom to shape the mortar. spilled mortar.

Allow the mortar to cure for a few days, then clean the patio with water and a stiff-bristle brush. After the mortar cures for a week, apply a stone sealer, following the manufacturer’s instructions.

                                                                                                                    Patio Projects •   87

The moldable nature of poured concrete makes it ideal for creating patios with curves and custom shapes in addition to perfect squares and rectangles. If your patio plans call for a neighboring concrete walkway, see pages 150 to 155.

88 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Concrete Slab Patio F ew outdoor surfaces are as heavy-duty as a properly poured concrete slab. As a patio m aterial, poured concrete is tough to beat. The surface is flat, smooth, lOft. in diameter. If you are building a patio of any shape that abuts your house, always isolate it from the house with an isolation board and slope the surface so easy to clean, and about as close to maintenance- water drains away from the foundation. A smaller slab free as you can get. A concrete slab is also the best is much more manageable for amateurs. Larger slabs foundation for permanent finishes like mortared brick, often require that you place and tool the wet concrete tile, and stone. And if you like the simplicity and in workable sections, and these steps must continue durability of a bare concrete patio but flat gray doesn’t simultaneously until the entire slab is filled and suit your design scheme, you can always apply an acid leveled before the concrete begins to set. Therefore, stain, dry pigment colors, or concrete paint (rated it’s a good idea to seek guidance and/or assistance for exterior use) for custom coloring effects without from a concrete professional if your plans call for a compromising the surface’s performance. large patio. If you’ve never worked with poured concrete Because they are permanent structures, concrete before, you’ll find that most of the work lies in patios are often governed by local building codes, and preparing the site and building the forms for you might need a permit for your project-especially containing and shaping the wet concrete. Once the if the patio abuts a permanent structure. Before you concrete is mixed or delivered to your site, time is of get started, contact your city’s building department the essence, and the best way to ensure quality results to learn about permit requirements and general is to be prepared with strong forms, the right tools, construction specifications in your area, including: and an understanding of each step of the process. And it never hurts to have help: you’ll need at least two • Zoning restrictions hardworking assistants for the placing and finishing • Depth of gravel subbase stages. See pages 98 to 99 for some more useful • Concrete composition information on working with concrete. • Slab thickness and slope This patio project follows the steps for building a • Internal reinforcement (wire mesh, rebar, etc.) small (l00 square feet or so) slab that can be poured • Control joints (see page 98) and finished all at once . The patio featured here is • Moisture barrier under slab (not a common a circular, freestanding structure slightly more than requirement)

 Concrete Coverage ~

               Volume                          Slab Thickness                           Surface Area

               1 cubic yard                              2"                              160 square feet

               1 cubic yard                              3"                              110 square feet

               1 cubic yard                              4"                              80 square feet

               1 cubic yard                              5"                              65 square feet

               1 cubic yard                              6"                              55 square feet

               1 cubic yard                              8"                              40 square feet

                                                                                                           Patio Projects •   89

     Tools & Materials ~
     Drill                                 Eye protection                 Push broom                                Isolation board
     Circular saw                          Plumb bob                      Lumber (1 x 2,                              and construction
     Hand maul or                          Chalk line                       2 x 4)                                    adhesive
       sledgehammer                        Hammer                         Compactable                               Concrete form release
     Mason's string                        Hardboard lap siding             gravel                                    agent
     Stakes                                Bolt cutters                   Screws                                    4,000 psi concrete (or
     Marking paint                         Concrete mixing tools          6 x 6" 10/10 welded                         as required by local
     Line level                            Shovel or masonry hoe            wire mesh                                 code)
     Excavation tools                      Wheelbarrow                    Tie wire                                  Clear polyethylene
     Bow rake                              Bull float                     2" wire bolsters                            sheeting
     Level                                 Edger                          Work gloves                               Lawn edger (available
     Plate compactor or                    I" groover                     Square-nose spade                           for rent)
       hand tamper                         Magnesium trowel               Safety protection

I Construction Details When is Concrete Ready to Finish? ~ Floating wet concrete causes the 7/,6” thick Control joint heavy materials in the mix to sink hardboard siding below the surface, leaving a layer of 3’12 to 4” water-know as bleed water-on concrete the surface. To achieve an attractive 2 x 4 stake ~ \ ~----’ ._----. and durable finish, let the bleed water disappear before proceeding with the final finishing steps (edging, o control joints, and finish troweling). • • o 6..>< 6 wire . How long this takes depends on the • .. re-mesh o … <> • air temperature, humidity, and sun o CJ 6o C)t’? 0 0 00 ° 0 0 0 0 0 (:) 0 Cl 0 06 0 f”’-;, exposure; you just have to watch and wait. o c. 0 0 6 ” compactable gravel 0 C”’) ""—! Once the bleed water dries, oo 00 0 00 0 a 0 0 0 0 - 00 0 0 a test the concrete for hardness by o ~ Cl n D 0 0 0 0 Q) (j stepping on it: if your foot sinks o C) <V CO °0 () ° 0 ::‘0 00 b-> in no more than W’, the concrete C) 0 CJ 0° 0 oOOCJC’) is ready for finishing. Be extra diligent with any areas exposed to the sun or wind, as they can dry much faster than other spots. Note: Air-entrained concrete (commonly used for cold-weather pours) doesn’t show bleed water, so you have to rely on the step test to know when it’s time to Well-constructed forms and properly-prepared foundational elements will ensure start finishing your slab is structurally sound.

90 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Build a Round Concrete Patio

Establish layout lines for the site excavation using batterboards, mason’s string, and inverted marking paint. Set the lines so they reach at least 12” beyond the work area on all sides. Plan for the gravel base to extend 12” beyond the slab. Use two pairs of perpendicular batterboards with strings to establish the centerpoint of a round patio (where the strings intersect). To create a rough outline for the patio excavation, drive a stake at the centerpoint and then attach a string to the top of the stake. Tape the other end of the string to a can of inverted marking paint so the distance from the stake to the can equals the radius of the circle, including the gravel base; mark the outline.

Cut the sod on the perimeter of the excavation area to define Excavate the site for a 6 to 8”-thick compactable gravel where to dig. For better access, first remove the batterboards subbase plus any sub-grade (below ground level) portion of (or at least the strings). A lawn edger works well for cutting the the slab. If building next to your house, grade the soil so it outline into the sod (be sure to wear safety equipment). slopes away from the house at Vs” per foot. Measure down from the leveled cross strings with a story pole to gauge the depth as you work. Compact the soil after grading using a plate compactor or a hand tamper. (continued)

                                                                                                                      Patio Projects •   91

    Patio Next to a House ~
    If your patio will butt up to a
    house or another permanent
    structure, you should use
    the house or structure as
    your starting point for setting
    slope and establishing a patio
    layout. Snap a chalk line onto
    the house foundation at the
    precise elevation of the top of
    the finished slab. This should
    be 1 to 3" below any patio
    door threshold. You can use
    this line for reference during
    the site prep the concrete
    pour, and finishing.

Fill the excavation area with a 4”-thick layer of compactable Use a plate compactor to tamp the first 4” of graded gravel. Use an upside-down bow or garden rake to move the compactable gravel. Add another 2 to 4” layer of gravel until rock around. Rake the rock until it is level and follows the the top surface will compact to the finished level. Use cross grade of the soil base. strings and the story pole to make sure the subbase is uniform and follows the ‘Is ” per ft. slope. Tamp until the gravel is compacted and at the correct height relative to your lines.

92 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Set level lines for the form height. Replace batterboards and retie the mason’s lines so they are level. If you are making a circular patio, as seen here, add intermediate stakes between the batterboards and the tie lines to divide the circle into at least eight segments. Drop a plumb bob from the point where the lines intersect, and drive a stake at this centerpoint. Use this stake to create a string guide and redraw the patio outline (inset).

Drive stakes for anchoring the forms Install forms. Here, 7;16”-thick pieces Drive stakes behind the forms around the perimeter of the patio, just of hardboard lap siding have been rip- anywhere where the strips require outside the outline. Drive the stakes cut into 3Y2” strips to make bendable additional bending or anchoring to deep enough that they will be beneath forms. Cut each strip long enough to follow the round outline. Attach the the tops of the forms. Use a hand maul span three stakes as it follows the patio forms to the stakes. Note: If you are or sledgehammer to drive the stakes. To outline. Screw the strip to the middle installing straight 2 x 4 forms, drive prevent them from splitting, use a scrap stake first, making sure the top is the screws through the outsides of the 2 x 4 as a hammer block to absorb the correct distance down from the layout stake and into the form boards to make blows. Drive a stake at each point where string. Bend the form to follow the them easier to remove later. a string intersects the patio outline. outline and attach it to the other stakes. (continued)

                                                                                                                   Patio Projects •   93

Lay wire mesh over the gravel base, keeping the edges 1 to 2” Place 4000 psi concrete in the form, starting at the side from the insides of the form. Overlap the mesh strips by 6” and tie furthest from the concrete source. Before pouring, construct them together with tie wire. Prop up the mesh on 2” wire bolsters access ramps so wheelbarrows can rollover the forms placed every few feet and tied to the mesh with wire. If required, without damaging them, and coat the insides of the form with install isolation board along the house foundation. a release agent or vegetable oil to prevent the forms from sticking. Distribute the concrete with a shovel or masonry hoe. As you fill, hammer against the outsides of the forms to eliminate air pockets.

Screed the surface with a long, straight 2 x 4: have two Float the concrete surface with a bull float: without applying people pull the board backward in a side-to-side sawing pressure, push and pull the float in straight, parallel passes, motion, with the board resting on top of the form. As you overlapping each pass slightly with the next. Slightly tip up the work, shovel in extra concrete to fill the low spots or remove leading edge of the float to prevent gouging the surface. Stop concrete from high spots, and re-screed. The goal is to create a floating once the surface is relatively smooth and has a wet flat surface that’s level with the top of the form. sheen. Be careful not to over-float, indicated by water pooling on the surface. Allow the bleed water to disappear.

94 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Use an edger to shape all edges of the slab that contact Cut a control joint (if required) using a 1” groover guided by the wood form. Carefully run the edger back and forth along a straight 2 x 4. In most cases, you’ll need to erect a temporary the form to create a smooth, rounded corner. Slightly lift the bridge to allow access for cutting in the center of the patio. leading edge of the tool as needed to prevent gouging. Take great care here. Be sure to cut grooves while concrete is still wo rkable. Make several light passes back and forth until the groove reaches full depth, lifting the leading edge of the tool to prevent gouging.

Flatten ridges and create a smooth surface with a Cure the concrete by misting the slab with water, then magnesium trowel. This will create a smooth surface that takes covering it with a single piece of polyethylene sheeting. a finish well once the concrete has dried. Another finishing Smooth out any air pockets (which can cause discoloration), option is simply to skip the additional floating. Then, before the and weight the sheeting along the edges. Mist the slab and concrete dries completely, brush lightly with a push broom to reapply the plastic daily for 1 to 2 weeks. create a nonslip “broomed” surface.

                                                                                                                   Patio Projects •   95

IAcid-Stained Concrete Patio

A cid staining is a permanent color treatment for cured concrete that yields a translucent, attractively mottled finish ideally suited to patios. Unlike paint or Another important preparation step with either new or old concrete is to color-test a few shades of stain on the concrete you’ll be working with. Stain pigmented concrete stains, both of which are surface suppliers often sell sample-size quantities of stain for coatings, acid stain is a chemical solution that soaks into this purpose. Since acid stain affects every surface the concrete pores and reacts with the minerals to create a little differently, it’s worth the effort to run a test the desired color. The color doesn’t peel or flake off, and before committing to a color. Be sure to test in it fades very little over many years. Acid stain won’t hide an inconspicuous area, because the stain can’t be blemishes or discoloration in the original concrete surface, removed once it’s applied. but many consider this an important part of its natural appeal. If your patio or wall(\vay is fully exposed, bear in mind that some colors of acid stain may fade in direct Tools & Materials ~ sunlight, so be sure to choose a color guaranteed by the manufacturer not to fade. Tape Eye protection You can apply acid stain to new concrete that has Plastic sheeting NIOSH/MSHA- cured for at least four to six weeks (check the stain manu- Stiff-bristled brush approved respirator facturer’s requirements for curing times) or old concrete Concrete cleaner Cleaner/neutralizer that is free of any previously applied sealants. Test old and solvent Medium-bristled concrete by spraying the surface with water: if the water All-plastic garden scrub brush beads on the surface instead of soaking in, there’s prob- sprayer Towel ably a sealer on there, and it must be removed for good Stain Sealer results with the stain. Ask the stain manufacturer for Protective clothing recommended concrete sealer remover products to use.

Acid-staining a patio is a fairly simple procedure that can be done by almost everyone. Be sure the surface is completely cured, clean (use water, not soap), and dry; and be sure to wear the protective gear, as recommended by the manufacturer. A properly maintained acid-stained patio can last forever.

96 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Apply an Acid Stain

Protect all surfaces adjacent to the Clean the entire surface with an Spray the stain onto the concrete concrete and any nearby plants with approved cleaner and stiff-bristled brush. using random circular motions and tape and plastic sheeting. Mix the stain with water in an all-plastic holding the spray tip about 18” from the garden sprayer, as directed. Use an surface. Work backward from one side. approved solvent to remove undesirable Maintain pressure on the sprayer so the markings on the concrete surface (stain spray pattern is consistently fine and won’t hide them). Rinse thoroughly and even. Wet the surface completely, but then let dry. avoid creating puddles. Allow the first coat of stain to dry completely.

Apply a second coat using the same Wash the surface using a technique. Darker tones will appear with recommended cleanerlneutralizer the second coat; the wetter the surface, and a medium-bristled scrub brush to the darker the tones will be (but again, remove dried stain residue. Thoroughly avoid puddles of stain). Let the second rinse according to the manufacturer’s coat dry completely. instructions. Test-wipe the surface with a white towel: If the towel shows stain, Apply sealer using a high-quality deck! wash and rinse the surface again. patio sprayer (or other recommended applicator). Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations- most sealers require multiple coats. Warning ~ Maintain even pressure on the sprayer for a consistently fine spray. Wet the surface completely with a thin coating, Always pour acid stain into water; never pour water into acid stain. and avoid puddles. Let the sealer dry between coats.

                                                                                                                Patio Projects •   97

    Working with Concrete ~
    Estimating concrete can be done with a simple
    calculation. Concrete quantity is measured in cubic yards.
    To calculate the volume of concrete needed for your
    project, simply follow these steps:

         1. Multiply the width and length of the slab (in feet)
            to find the total square footage. For example: 10ft.
            (width) x 12 ft. (length) = 120 sq. ft.
         2. Convert the thickness dimension of the slab
            to feet by dividing by 12. For example: 4" (slab
            thickness) + 12 = 0.33 feet.
         3. Multiply the square footage by the thickness to
            find the cubic volume in feet, then divide by 27 to
            find the cubic yard volume: 120 x 0.33 = 39.6 cu. ft.
            39.6 + 27 = 1.47 cu. yd.

    When estimating concrete needs, it's best to round up to
    the nearest half increment to make sure you don't run
    short. Therefore, for a slab volume of 1.25 cubic yards,
    purchase or order at least 1.5 yards of concrete.
          Isolation joints prevent the wet concrete from
    bonding to the adjoining structure and act as a cushion
    to prevent damage if any seasonal movement occurs.              Isolation joints are required wherever a new concrete slab
    The standard material for slab isolation joints is W'-thick     abuts a permanent structure, such as a house foundation, a
                                                                    wall, or another concrete slab.
    asphalt-impregnated fiberboard. The board should be
    glued or nailed to the adjoining structure prior to the
    concrete pour. After the new concrete has cured, trim off
    the top 1/2" or so of the isolation board and fill the joint
    with a suitable masonry caulk, if desired.
          A control joint works somewhat like a fault line:
    because cracking is a normal occurrence with slabs, the
    joint creates a weak spot in the structure, encouraging
    cracks to follow the joint (where they are less visible).
          Consult your local building department for
    recommendations and requirements for control joint
    frequency and placement. In general, a control joint
    groove should equal a quarter of the total slab thickness
    (for example, a 4"-thick slab gets 1"-deep joints). For best
    performance and appearance, arrange control joints in
    a symmetrical grid pattern, dividing the slab into roughly
    equal square sections. For large slabs, control joints are
    typically required every 8 to 12 feet. Joints in concrete
    walkways are typically spaced at one-and-a-half times the
    width of the walkway sections (for example, a 2-foot-wide
    walkway should have a control joint every 3 feet).

                                                                    Control joints are permanent, straight grooves cut into the
                                                                    top surface of concrete slabs during the finishing process.

98 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

 When mixing your own concrete, work with

premixed dry concrete. It is commonly sold in 60- and 80-lb. bags. Using premixed concrete ensures you get the right formulation for quality results. There are several types of premixed concrete, each with specific properties-such as fiber-reinforced or high-early- strength-so choose the formulation that best suits your application. A 60-lb. bag of concrete mix yields roughly half a cubic foot of solid concrete. For a patio slab, the number of bags required adds up quickly. If you’re planning a sizable slab that must be poured all at once, or any job requiring at least a cubic yard of concrete, TO mix concrete with a power mixer, fill a bucket with ‘12 gallon of clean water for each 60-lb. bag of dry you’re better off ordering ready-mix (see below). For mix (three bags is workable for most mixers). Pour in % small jobs, you can mix a couple of bags at a time in a of the water, and then add all of the dry ingredients. Mix mortar box or wheelbarrow. For larger projects, consider for 1 minute. Add water as needed to reach the desired renting a power concrete mixer. consistency, then mix for 3 minutes. Empty the mix into a Follow the manufacturer’s instructions carefully when wheelbarrow, and rinse the drum immediately. mixing the concrete. Most manufacturers recommend mixing in just half of the water to start with, then adding TO mix concrete by more water incrementally until the proper consistency hand, pour dry mix from is achieved. If mixed too dry, the concrete will be difficult bags into a mortar box or to work; if too wet, the strength of the finished surface wheelbarrow. Pour in ‘12 is compromised. gallon of clean water for each 60-lb. bag of mix. Ready-mix concrete is ordered and profes- Work the mixture with a sionally delivered for jobs that call for one cubic yard mason’s hoe or garden or more. Here are some tips for ordering concrete for hoe, carefully adding water your project: to achieve the desired consistency. Do not • Discuss your project with the experts at the ready- overwork the mix. mix company. They will help you determine how much and what type of concrete you need. • Be prepared for the pour, with a well-secured form, all the necessary tools, and plenty of helpers. Last- minute changes or a “wing it” attitude can lead to disastrous results with poured concrete. • Establish a clear delivery path to the project site. Lay down a walkway of wood planks for wheelbarrow travel over grass and soft materials. Make sure the truck has plenty of room to park without damaging your property. • Call the ready-mix company the day before the scheduled pour to confirm the quantity and delivery time. • Read the receipt you get from the driver: it gives the Ready-mix may cost more than premixed bags, but it’s time the batch was mixed. Before you accept the much faster for large projects, and there’s no guesswork delivery, make sure no more than 90 minutes have in getting the right consistency. Many ready-mix elapsed between the mixing and delivery times. companies have a 1-yard minimum for delivery orders.

                                                                                                             Patio Projects •   99

ISeeded Concrete & Wood Patio

A    poured concrete patio divided by wood forms is an
     attractive alternative to a monolithic concrete slab.
In addition to its decorative appearance, this type of
                                                                     Tools & Materials ~
surface is easier to create, since the permanent forms               Rope or hose                Concrete mix
divide the concrete pour into four equal sections (or more,          Mason's string              Seeding aggregate
as desired). Each section can be poured and finished                 Excavation tools            Polyethylene
before moving on to the next, or you can complete all                Hand tamp or plate            sheeting
the quadrants in a day. If you choose the latter, you must             compactor                 Concrete sealer
watch the poured quadrants carefully and finish them at              Wheelbarrow                 Eye and ear
the proper time, so you'll need a couple of helpers. As an           Masonry hoe                   protection
optional addition, this project includes steps for seeding           Magnesium float             Square-nose spade
the concrete with small stones, or seeding aggregate,                Wood concrete float         Scrap 2 x 2 lumber
introducing color and texture to the concrete surface.               Concrete edger              Galvanized deck
     The form lumber used in the project is brown,                   Stiff-bristled brush          screws (2W', 4")
pressure-treated 2 x 4s, chosen because it's more                    Paint roller                Masking tape
attractive than most green-treated wood. If green is all             Stakes                      Heavy-duty wire
you can find, you can color the wood with a compatible               Compactable gravel            cutters
stain. In any case, use high-quality lumber rated for                Pressure-treated            Hammer
ground contact, and avoid the type with visible incise                 2 x 4 lumber              Gloves and particle
marks on the surface, a result of certain forms of                   6 x 6" [lO/lOJ                mask
treatment. For bolder grid lines, you can use 4 x 4                    welded wire mesh          Circular saw
lumber instead of 2 x 4, joining the form pieces with                2" wire bolsters
galvanized spikes.

This four-square patio replaced a small, crumbling slab that had become an eyesore. The new patio combines pressure-treated
wood with aggregate to create a natural-looking, durable surface.

100 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Construction Details

This divided concrete patio includes 4”-thick • Zoning restrictions concrete slabs reinforced internally with 6 x 6” • Depth of gravel subbase 10/10 welded wire mesh. The mesh is supported • Concrete composition by 2” wire bolsters to keep it near the middle of • Slab thickness and slope the slab interior. The patio, including the forms, • Internal reinforcement (wire mesh, is built upon a 6” subbase of compacted gravel. rebar, etc.) When planning your patio project, consult your • Moisture barrier under slab local building department to learn about the following requirements: Adapt the project as shown to meet the local requirements. For additional information on working with concrete, see pages 88 to 95 and 98 to 99.

                                                 D
                                                 o
                                                      D
                                             o

                                                                                     Seeding
                                                                                     aggregate

                                                                               Concrete

                                                                           Deck screws

     Pressure-
     treated 2 X 4s

                                                      mesh

                      Compactable           Bolster
                      gravel

                                                                                                 Patio Projects •   101

I How to Build a Seeded concrete & Wood Patio

Prepare the building site by removing any existing building     Layout the rough position of the patio using a rope or
materials, such as for a sidewalk or landing area. If the new   hose, then mark the exact layout with stakes and mason's
patio will abut the house foundation under a patio door, plan   strings. Set the strings for a %"-per-ft. downward slope away
to make the height of the finished surface 1 to 3" below the    from the foundation (see pages 40 to 45 for detailed steps on
door threshold.                                                 site layout and preparation).

Remove sod and excavate the project area to a consistent        Create a subbase for the patio by filling the site with an even
depth using mason's strings attached to stakes for reference.   3" layer of compactable gravel and tamp the gravel with a
Mark the excavation depth onto a story pole, and use it to      hand tamp or rented plate compactor. Add more gravel for a
make sure the excavation is a uniform distance from the         total base thickness of 6" after compaction. Grade the gravel to
strings at all points.                                          follow the slope of the layout and tamp thoroughly.

102 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

                                                                    Half-length
                                                                    form boards

                                                                                                                 Full-length
                                                                                                                 form board

Cut pressure-treated 2 x 4 boards to build a permanent Cut and install pressure-treated 2 x 4s to divide the square frame that outlines the entire patio site. Lay the boards in place into quadrants; cut one piece full length, and attach two using mason’s strings as guides. Fasten the ends together with one-half length pieces to it with screws driven toenail style. 2’12” galvanized deck screws. Temporarily stake the forms at Drive 4” deck screws partway into the forms every 12” at 2-ft. intervals, set a straight 2 x 4 across the side forms, and inside locations. The portions that stick out will act as tie rods set a level on top of the 2 x 4 to check the side forms for level. between the poured concrete and the permanent forms. Tip: Wear gloves and a particle mask when cutting pressure- Tip: Protect the tops of the permanent forms by covering them treated lumber. with masking tape.

Cut reinforcing wire mesh to fit inside each quadrant, Smooth off the concrete with a straight 2 x 4 screed board leaving 1” clearance on all sides. Mix concrete and pour the that rests on the forms. Settle the concrete by sliding a spade quadrants one at a time, starting with the one located farthest along the inside edges of the forms and rapping the outer from the concrete source. Use a masonry hoe to spread the edges of the forms with a hammer. concrete evenly in the forms. (continued)

                                                                                                                    Patio Projects •   103

Allow bleed water to disappear, and then spread clean               Pat the aggregate down with the screed board, then
seeding aggregate evenly over the surface by hand or with           float the surface with a magnesium float until a thin layer of
a shovel . Note: if you're using small aggregate (up to 1" in       concrete covers the stones. Do not overfloat. If bleed water
diameter), spread it out in a single layer; for larger aggregate,   appears, stop floating and let it dry before completing the
maintain a separation between stones that is roughly equal to       step. If you are seeding a large area, cover it with polyethylene
the size of the stone.                                              sheeting to keep the concrete from hardening too quickly.

Cut along the edges of the quadrant with a concrete edger,          Option: If you have enough help and your project is small
then use a wood float to smooth out any marks left behind           enough, you may want to pour remaining quadrants at this
by the tool.                                                        time, repeating steps 7 through 11. Be sure to check poured
                                                                    quadrants periodically: if the surface water has evaporated
                                                                    from the concrete, uncover the quadrants and proceed to
                                                                    step 12.

104 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

After all the water has evaporated from the concrete After the concrete has cured, rinse and scrub the surface, expose the aggregate by misting the surface with aggregate again to clean off any remaining residue. Tip: Use water and scrubbing the surface with a stiff-bristled brush . diluted muriatic acid to wash off stubborn concrete residue. Remove the protective tape from the forms, then recover the Read manufacturer’s instructions for mixing rations and quadrants with sheeting and let the concrete cure for one week. safety precautions.

After three weeks, seal the patio surface with exposed-aggregate sealer. Reapply sealer periodically as needed, following the manufacturer’s recommendations.

                                                                                                               Patio Projects •   105

I Tiled Concrete Slab O utdoor tile can be made of several different materials and is available in many colors and styles. Using natural stone tiles with different shapes Tools & Materials ~ and complementary colors, as demonstrated in this Tape measure Buckets project, is a great way to draw attention to the elegant Pencil Paint roller surface. Tile manufacturers may offer brochures boivinob Chalk line Plastic sheeting you ideas for modular patterns that can be created Tile cutter or wet Thin-set mortar from their tiles. Make sure the tiles you select are saw Modular tile intended for outdoor use. Tile nippers Grout When laying a modular, geometric pattern with square-notched Grout additive tiles of different sizes, it’s crucial that you test the trowel Grout sealer layout before you begin and that you place the first 2 x 4 padded with Tile sealer tiles very carefullly. The first tiles will dictate the carpet Ear and eye placement of all other tiles in your layout. Hammer protection You can pour a new concrete slab on which to Grout float Work gloves install your tile patio (see pages 88 to 95), but another Grout sponge Mason’s trowel option is to finish an existing slab by veneering it with Caulk gun Cloth tile-the scenario shown here. Tile spacers Foam brush Outdoor tile must be installed on a clean, flat and stable surface. When tiling an existing concrete slab, the surface must be free of flaking, wide cracks, and other major imperfections. A damaged slab can be Note: Wear eye protection when cutting tile, handle repaired by applying a one- to two-inch-thick layer of cut tiles carefully-the cut edges of some materials may new concrete over the old surface before laying tile. be very sharp.

Stone tiles can be laid as veneer over a concrete patio slab-a very easy way to create an elegant patio.

106 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

                                                                                      Tile options for landscape
                                                                                      installations: Slate and other smooth,

Slate Cut Terra-cotta tile natural stone materials are durable and blend well with any landscape, but are usually expensive. Quarry tile is less expensive, though only available in limited colors. Exterior-rated porcelain or ceramic tiles are moderately priced and available in a wide range of colors and textures, with many styles imitating the look of natural stone. Terra cotta tile is made from molded clay for use in warm, dry climates only. Many of these materials require application of a sealer to increase durability and prevent staining and moisture penetration.

                                                                                      Exterior tile installation tools include:
      Angle                                                                           a wet saw for cutting tile quickly and easily
      grinder                                                               Wet saw   (available at rental centers-make certain
                                                                                      to rent one that is big enough for the tile
                                                                                      size you install), an angle grinder with a

Sponge diamond-edged cutting blade (also a rental item) for cutting curves or other complex contours, a trowel with square notches (of the size required for your tile size) for spreading the mortar adhesive, spacers for accurate aligning of tiles and setting consistent joint widths, a straight length of 2 x 4 padded along one edge (carpet pad works well) for helping align tile surfaces, r:-.s’ a grout float for spreading grout to fill the .: Notched tr01i1r4 joints, and a sponge for cleaning excess grout from tile surfaces. Grout float Space”

                                                                                      Exterior tile installation materials
.~.

           Thinset            Grout                               Grout               include: latex-modified thin set mortar
           mortar                                                 sealers             adhesive that is mixed with water (if you
                                                                                      can't find thinset that is latex modified,
                                                                                      buy unmodified thinset and mix it with
                                                                                      a latex additive for mortar following
                                                                                      manufacturer's directions), exterior-rated
                                                                                      grout available in a variety of colors to
                                                                                      match the tile you use, grout additive
                                                                                      to improve durability, grout sealer to
                                                                                      help protect grout from moisture and
                                                                                      staining, and tile sealer required for some
                                                                                      tile materials (follow tile manufacturer's
                                                                                      requirements).

                                                                                                                    Patio Projects •   107

I Evaluating Concrete Surfaces



A good surface is free from any                 A fair surface may exhibit minor                A poor surface contains deep or large
major cracks or badly flaking concrete          cracking and spalling but has no major          cracks, broken, sunken, or heaved
(called spalling). You can apply patio tile     cracks or badly deteriorated spots.             concrete, or extensive spalling. If you
directly over a concrete surface that is        Install a new concrete subbase over a           have this kind of surface, remove the
in good condition if it has control joints      surface in fair condition before laying         concrete completely and replace it with
(see below).                                    patio tile.                                     a new concrete slab before you lay
                                                                                                patio tile.

I Cutting Control Joints in a Concrete Patio

                                                                                                                        Control joint
                                                                                                                        location

    Control join~

Cut new control joints into existing concrete patios that are in good condition but do not have enough control joints. Control
joints allow inevitable cracking to occur in locations that don't weaken the concrete or detract from its appearance. They should be
cut every 5 or 6 ft. in a patio. Plan the control joints so they will be below tile joints once the tile layout is established (photo, above
right). Use a circular saw with a masonry blade set to 3Js" depth to cut control joints. Cover the saw base with duct tape to prevent it
from being scratched.

108 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Tile a Patio Slab House

1 II I I I Modular unit I

        __________           Adjn".~li"'~          ______    ~_--L
                                                             1
                                                                      ________ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

                                                             I
                                                             I
                                                             I
                                                             I G Centerline
                                       Adjn".d    lin.~I
                                                             I
                                                             I
                                                             I
                                                             I
                                                             I

TO establish a layout for tile with a modular pattern, you must carefully determine the location of the first tile. On the clean and dry concrete surface, measure and mark a centerline down the center of the slab. Test-fit tiles along the line-because of the modular pattern used here, the tiles are staggered. Mark the edge of a tile nearest the center of the pad, then create a second line perpendicular to the first and test-fit tiles along this line.

                                                                                    .-

Make adjustments as needed so the modular pattern breaks evenly over the patio surface and is symmetrical from side to side. You may need to adjust the position of one or both lines. The intersection of the lines is where your tile installation will begin. Outline the position of each group of tiles on the slab. (continued)

                                                                                                                       Patio Projects •   109

                                                 r
                                                                ,-
                                        I
                                                           .~   II

                                                                ,

Variation: To establish a traditional grid pattern, test-fit rows    Following manufacturer's instructions, mix enough
of tiles so they run in each direction, intersecting at the center   thinset mortar to work for about 2 hours (start with 4 to 5"
of the patio. Adjust the layout to minimize tile cutting at the      deep in a 5-gallon bucket). At the intersection of the two layout
sides and ends, then mark the final layout and snap chalk lines      lines, use a notched-edge trowel to spread thinset mortar over
across the patio to create four quadrants. As you lay tile, wo rk    an area large enough to accommodate the layout of the first
along the chalk lines and in one quadrant at a time.                 modular group of tiles. Hold the trowel at a 45° angle to rake
                                                                     the mortar to a consistent depth.

Set the first tile, twisting it slightly as you push it into the     Position the second tile adjacent to the first with a slight
mortar. Align it with both adjusted layout lines, then place a       gap between them. Place spacers on end in the joint near each
padded 2 x 4 over the center of the tile and give it a light rap     corner and push the second tile against the spacers. Make
with a hammer to set the tile.                                       certain the first tile remain s aligned with the layout lines. Set the
                                                                     padded 2 x 4 across both tiles and tap to set. Use a damp cloth
                                                                     to remove any mortar that squeezes out of the joint or gets on
                                                                     tile surfaces. Joints must be at least Vs"-deep to hold grout.

110 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Lay the remaining tiles of the first modular unit using With the first modular unit set, continue laying tile spacers. Using the trowel, scrape the excess mortar from following the pattern established. You can use the chalk lines the concrete slab in areas you will not yet be working on to for general reference, but they will not be necessary as layout prevent it from hardening and interfering with the installation. lines. To prevent squeeze-out between tiles, scrape a heavy accumulation of mortar W’ away from the edge of a set tile before setting the adjacent tile.

 Cutting Curves in Tile ~
 TO make convex (left) or concave (right) curves, mark the profile of the curve on the tile, then use a wet saw to make
 parallel straight cuts, each time cutting as close to the marked line as possible. Use a tile nippers to break off small
 portions of tabs, gradually working down to the curve profile. Finally, use an angle grinder to smooth off the sharp edges
 of the tabs. Make sure to wear a particle mask when using the tile saw and wear sturdy gloves when using the nippers.

                                                                            . _4         ...
                                                                                   ~

                                                                               . ,. .   .-

                                                                                                                        (continued)

                                                                                                                    Patio Projects •   111

                                              ;....---

                                                --

                                                -----,

After installing the tile, cover the tiled area with plastic, and        Use a grout float to spread grout over an area that is roughly
let the thinset mortar cure according to the manufacturer's              10 sq. ft. Pu sh down with the face of the float to force grout
instructions. When tile has fully set, remove the plastic and mix        into the joints, then hold the float edge at a 45° angle to the tile
grout, using a grout additive instea d of water. Grout additive          su rface and scrape off the excess grout.
is especially important in outdoor applications, because it
creates joints that are more resilient in changing temperatures.

Once you've grouted this area, wipe off the grout residue using a damp sponge. Wipe with a light, circular motion-you wa nt to
clean tile surfaces without pulling grout out of the joints. Don't try to get the tile perfectly clean the first time. Wipe the area several
times, rinsing out the sponge frequently.

112 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

                                                                    Grouting Porous Tiles ~
                                                                   Some tiles, such as slate, have highly porous surfaces
                                                                   that can be badly stained by grout. For these tiles,
                                                                   apply grout by filling an empty caulk tube (available
                                                                   at tile stores and some building centers) with grout,
                                                                   and apply the grout to the joints with a caulk gun. Cut
                                                                   the tip to make an opening just large enough to allow
                                                                   grout to be forced out. Run the tip down the joint
                                                                   between tiles as you squeeze out the grout. Remove
                                                                   the grout that gets on the tile surface with a wet
                                                                   sponge. You may need to use your finger to force
                                                                   grout into the joint-protect your skin by wearing a
                                                                   heavy glove to do this.

Once the grout has begun to set (usually about 1 hour, depending on temperature and humidity), clean the tile surfaces again. You want to thoroughly clean grout residue from tile surfaces because it is difficult to remove once it has hardened. Buff off a light film left after final cleaning with a cloth.

                                                                 13
       ---

Cover the pad with plastic and let the grout cure according Apply tile sealer to the entire surface using a paint roller. to manufacturer’s instructions. Once the grout has cured, use Cover the patio with plastic and allow the sealer to dry a foam brush to apply grout sealer to only the grout, wiping completely before exposing the patio to weather or traffic. any spillover off of tile surfaces.

                                                                                                                 Patio Projects •   113

ILoose Materials Patio

G    ravel, crushed stone, wood chips, and other
     loose materials are very easy to install and are
a surprisingly attractive patio surface. The versatile
                                                                     (DG), for the finish material-or you can cover a
                                                                     coarser gravel base with granite fines (rock dust).
                                                                     Compact either surface with a plate compactor.
nature of loose material lends itself to everything from
creative mixed-media designs to plain surfaces that
evoke the simple beauty of Zen rock gardens.
    The basic installation of a loose materials                           Tools & Materials ~
patio starts with excavating the site, then adding
a two-inch layer of compacted gravel and edging                           Drill                         2 Y:z" dr)""Iall screws
material. Edging is required for this project to                          Circular saw                  Professional-grade
contain the loose surface material. From this                             Sledgehammer                    landscape fabric
point, the installation depends on the type of                            Mason's string                Compactable gravel
material you're using.                                                    Line level                    Edging
     For crushed stone, gravel, and other small aggre-                    Excavation tools              Gravel or other fill
gates, add one to two inches of surface material and                      Bow rake                        material
tamp flat; for river rock, add two inches or more (based                  Plate compactor               Eye and ear
on rock size); for wood chips, add at least a two-inch-                   Plumb bob                       protection
thick layer and rake smooth.                                              Lumber (2 x 2,                Work gloves
     For the smoothest, hardest surface, use a highly                       2 x 4)
compactable material, such as decomposed granite

A loose material patio provides a casual, natural environment for any type of patio. The footing is not as solid underfoot, so it is
best used where that is not a concern.

114 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Create a Loose Material Patio

Plan and excavate the site. Layout the patio site with Add compactable gravel and edging: cover the site with batterboards and mason’s strings, planning for a slope of Vs” per compactable gravel, rake it flat and smooth, and then tamp it foot (see pages 40 to 45 for detailed steps on layout and site thoroughly with a plate compactor. The layer should be about preparation). Excavate the site to a depth of 4” (or as desired, 2” thick after compaction. Install patio edging as desired, depending on the surface material and your application), setting it at least W’ higher than the top of the finished patio and tamp the soil with a plate compactor. Cover the site with surface to help contain the surface material. landscape fabric, overlapping the edges by at least 6” .

Option: Install accent pavers. Set Spread out the surface material Tamp the surface material. if pavers (stone, concrete, wood, or over the patio area, raking it into an appropriate, with a hand tamp, plate other material) onto the gravel base, even layer of the desired thickness. compactor, or drum roller to create an as desired. For flagstone and other even, flat surface. If the surface material materials that might not be flat on is stone or other masonry, spray the patio the bottom, add sand underneath to with water to wash away dirt and dust. prevent wobbling.

                                                                                                                     Patio Projects •   115

ILoose-fill Patio with Fire Pit

A    fire pit makes a wonderful focal point for
     backyard gatherings. Many local codes stipulate
that a fire pit area should be at least 20 feet across,
                                                                     ashlar stones that are relatively uniform in size and
                                                                     have flat sides that make for easy stacking. But you
                                                                     can use any type of stone you like, as well as cast
including the surrounding circular area that can be                  concrete retaining wall blocks. Whatever material
outfitted with chairs and benches. Dressed with                      you choose, set the wall stones on a solid foundation
rock (trap rock is shown here), this area creates                    of compactable gravel, as with a paver patio. It's
a safety zone between the pit and structures or                      most efficient to prep the base for the seating area
combustible yard elements, such as landscape                         at the same time as the fire pit.
plants and dry lawns. For comfort and safety, fire
pits should be installed only on level ground. If your
proposed seating area is on a slope, you can build a
retaining wall (see pages 51 to 55) on the high side,                     Tools & Materials ~
and the wall itself can provide another surface for
seating or setting down plates and drinks.                                Wheelbarrow                  Metal fire pit liner
     The fire pit featured here is constructed around                     Marking paint                Compactable gravel
a metal liner that you can buy from landscape                             Excavation tools             Dressing rock
supply centers. A liner will keep the fire pit wall                       Hand tamp                    Wall stones
from overheating and cracking if cooled suddenly                          Plate compactor              Rake
by rain or a bucket of water. The liner seen here is                      Level                        Eye and ear
a section of 36"-diameter corrugated culvert pipe.                        Straight 2 x 4                 protection
Other types of suitable liners are often sold as                          Hand maul or                 Work gloves
"barbecue rings" or "fire rings." Typically made of                         sledgehammer               Stakes
steel or iron, rings may include integral grills or have                  l"-dia. pipe                 Square-nose spade
flanges for setting in a removable barbecue grate.                        Landscape edging
The wall of the fire pit in this project is built with

A loose-fill patio and stone fire pit is what you'd expect to find in the Old West or on trails deep in the forest. Why not bring
this to your backyard? It's a simple DIY project that incorporates a compactable gravel foundation topped with a decorative rock or
loose stone material and an excavated area reserved for the fire pit.

116 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Construction Details

                        Wall blocks                                                Liner
                  (ashlar or interlocking)                                     (culvert pipe)
                                                                                                               Groundcover
                                                                                                                (trap rock)

                    1

I How to Build a Loose-fill Patio with Fire Pit

Mark the patio outline: drive a length of pipe into the center Cut out the sod and excavate the site to a level plane 4” of the pit area. Measure out from the pipe a distance equal to below grade (or as appropriate for the surface material) over the outside radius of the seating area. Use a cord with a loop the entire circled area, from pipe to perimeter (leave the pipe in it and a can of marking paint to draw a circle with this radius in place for now). onto the ground around the pipe.

                                                                                                                       (continued)

                                                                                                                   Patio Projects •   117

Excavate the fire pit wall area. Draw two more circles               Fill the trench with compactable gravel and tamp it
around the center pipe: an inner circle with a radius 6" smaller     thoroughly so it is very hard. Fill the entire patio area with
than the radius of the pit liner and an outer circle with a radius   compactable gravel to 2" below grade. Use a leve l on a stra ight
6" larger than the outside radius of the finished fire pit. These    2 x 4 to flatten and level the gravel (the area in the wa ll trench
lines mark the base for supporting the wa ll stones. Excavate        must be perfectly flat and leve l. Do not compact the top layer
an additional 4" down within this ring and compact the soil at       of gravel.
the bottom of the trench with a hand tamp.

Position the metal fire pit liner so it is centered around the       lay the first course of wall stones around the liner. Adjust
pipe and is perfectly leve l. Add or remove gravel beneath to        the stones so they maintain a consistent spacing to the liner
leve l the liner, as needed.                                         and between one another. Check with a leve l as you work to
                                                                     make sure the stones are level across the top.

118 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Lay the remaining courses of wall stones, staggering the vertical joints between courses. If desired, top the fire pit wall with a cap row of smooth, flat stones. The top of the wall should be at least slightly higher than the edge of the liner.

compact the gravel in the surrounding area with a plate Add a 2”-layer of top-dressing rock in the seating compactor. This will stabilize the area and form a hard subbase area, raking it flat and leve l. Compact the layer with a plate that inhibits weed growth. Install the edging of your choice compactor. Tip: Angular rock, such as the trap rock seen here, along the perimeter of the loose fill area. makes a better walking surface than smooth, rounded gravel.

                                                                                                                  Patio Projects •   119

IWood Tile Patio

W       o.od patio tiles, also called deck tiles or decking
        tIles, are manufactured units made with wood
slats and a plastic or rubber backing. Some tiles snap
                                                                        Tools & Materials ~
together, while others are simply laid down and held                    Wood tile                     Tape measure
in place by your own border or edge treatment. Some                     Cardboard                     Chalk line
manufacturers offer decorative edge strips for finishing                Jigsaw with down-             Rubber mats or tiles
the edges and corners, as well as tapered reducer                          cutting wood               Straightedge
strips for easing the transition between the tile and                      blade                      Utility knife
concrete surfaces. Tiles are commonly available in 12                   Corrosion-resistant           Eye and ear
and 24" squares, making it easy to plan your layout                        screws                       protection
before purchasing. You can also cut the tiles to suit                    Drill                        Clamps
your layout or fit around obstructions.                                  Sandpaper                    Work gloves

Wood patio tiles are made of wood slats held together by an underlying plastic mat or internal tubing. The slats are affixed
with screws or staples. This product offers all the warmth and character of decks or wooden floors for an enhanced outdoor
living experience.

120 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Cover a Patio with Wood Tiles 2

Set out a full row of tiles according to the desired pattern, Create cardboard templates to mark tiles for cutting to fit starting at one corner of the patio, to see how the tiles lay around corners and obstructions. Make the template blanks out. If cuts are required along the sides, start your layout in the same size as an installed tile. Mark and cut each blank as the center so the cut pieces will be equal on both side edges. needed until the template fits neatly around the obstruction. With the layout determined, begin setting the tiles (and border Set the template over a tile and trace along the cutout portion pieces, if applicable). with a pencil.

Cut tiles with a jigsaw fitted with a down -cutting wood Secure any loose slat ends (resulting from the cut) to the blade. This allows you to cut from the top side of the tile support base using corrosion-resistant screws (stainless steel without splintering the edges. Follow the pencil marks to are best). Drive the screws through the base and into the complete the cut. bottom face of the slat(s). Sand the cut edges, and install the tile. Lay the remaining tiles to complete the patio.

                                                                                                                Patio Projects •   121

IRubber Tile Patio

R     ubber pavers are available in large mats and
     individual paver units. For quick patio upgrades,
mats are generally the easiest and least expensive
                                                                            Tools & Materials ~
option. Covering a patio with mats couldn't be easier,                      Cardboard                      S traigh tedge
and the surface is maintenance-free, aside from a                           Jigsaw with down-              Utility knife
quick hose-down to keep it clean. Because of the                               cutting wood                Eye and ear
friction between rubber and concrete (in addition                              blade                          protection
to the weight of the mats), paver mats don't need                           Corrosion-resistant            Clamps
perimeter edging to stay in place. The rubber material                         screws                      Work gloves
is also more comfortable underfoot than concrete and                         Drill
other hard surfaces-a nice feature for outdoor cooks                        Sand paper
who spend a lot of time standing at the grill. When                         Tape measure
choosing rubber paver mats, look for products with                          Chalk line
good UV resistance and a nonslip, textured surface.                         Rubber mats or tiles
Some mats are made with recycled rubber, a decidedly
green option for this modern patio treatment.

Rubber tiles typical ly fit together in a tongue-and-groove system . They have an almost mesh underlayment that allows for
drainage as wel l as venti lation. Rubber tiles are often recycled, but there are many similar tile products of various hardness, size,
co lor, and material available.

122 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Cover a Patio with Rubber Mats or Tiles

Create a layout for the installation by measuring the patio Position mats along the reference line, following the (or using the mats themselves) and snapping one or more chalk desired pattern. Complete any full-mat rows, such as along the lines for reference. Determine which edges of the patio will look house wall or front edge of the patio. Align the remaining mats, best with full mats and which will have cut pieces. Typically, it’s letting any cut rows run long until all of the mats are in place. best to install full mats outward from the center so that cut mats along the side edges of the patio are roughly equal on both sides. If this layout yields cut mats smaller than half a mat, shift the layout so the centerline bisects full mats rather than following a seam. When you’re satisfied with the layout, snap a chalk line to guide the first row of mats at or near the patio’s center.

                                                                    4

Mark mats for cutting using a straightedge and a pencil. Cut the mats with a sharp utility knife and a straightedge. Start with a careful scoring cut, then make a few more passes to cut through the material. Lay the mats in place as you cut them to complete the installation.

                                                                                                                    Patio Projects •   123

IPatio Edging

E   dging can play many different roles in patio
    and walkway design. Its most practical purpose
is containment-keeping the surface material in
                                                           material surfaces, edging is typically installed on top of
                                                           the compacted gravel subbase. Edging along existing
                                                           concrete slabs can be applied on top of the slab or
place so paving doesn't drift off into the yard. As a      along the sides, with the proper order determined by
decorative feature, edging creates a visual border that    the finish materials.
adds a sense of order or closure to the path or patio           To minimize the number of cuts required for
space. This effect can be enhanced by edging with a        paving, install edging after the patio surface is
material that contrasts with the surface material or       complete. You can also install two adjacent sides of
can be made more subtle by using the same material,        edging to form a right angle, providing an accurate
perhaps in a slightly different pattern. Finally, edging   guide for starting the paver pattern, and then install
can serve to strengthen the patio or walkway as a hard,    the remaining two sides up against the laid pavers. A
protective curb that stands up to years of foot traffic.   third option is to set up temporary 2 X 4 edging, which
     The best time to install edging depends on            can be easily replaced with the real thing after the
your application. For most sandset paving and loose        paving is finished.

                                                                            Install professional-grade paver edging
                                                                            along cha lk lines (chalk lines are snapped
                                                                            directly below the outlines you've created
                                                                            with the mason's strings). The paver edge
                                                                            shou ld rest on the compacted gravel.

124 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Rigid Paver Edgi ng Choose heavy-duty edging that’s strong enough to contain your surface materials. If your patio Tools & Materials ~ or walkway has curves , buy plenty of notched, or flexible , edging for the curves. Also, buy 12”-long Maul Heavy-duty plastic galvanized spikes: one for every 12” of edging plus Snips or saw (for edging extra for curves. cutting edging) 12” galvanized spikes

Invisible Edging ~
Invisible edging is so named
for its low-profile edge that
stops about halfway up the
side edges of pavers. The
exposed portion of the edging
is easily concealed under soil
and sod or groundcover.

Rigid plastic edging installs
easily and works well for both
curved and straight walkways
made from paving stones or
brick pavers set in sand.

I How to Install Rigid Paver Edging

Set the edging on top of a compacted gravel base covered Cover the outside of the edging with soil and/or sod after with landscape fabric. using your layout strings as guides, the paving is complete. Tip: On two or more sides of the patio secure the edging with spikes driven every 12” (or as or path, you can spike the edging minimally, in case you have recommended by the manufacturer). Along curves, spike the to make adjustments during the paving. Anchor the edging edging at every tab, or as recommended. completely after the paving is done.

                                                                                                           Patio Projects •   125

I Brick Paver Edging                                                 Tools & Materials ~
Brick edging can be laid in several different
                                                                     Flat shovel                   Garden spade
configurations (see below): on-end with its edge
                                                                     Rubber mallet                 Work gloves
perpendicular to the paved surface ("soldiers"); on its
                                                                     2 X 4 (about 12" long)        Gravel
long edges; or laid flat, either parallel or perpendicular
                                                                     Bricks                        Landscape fabric
to the paving. For mortared surfaces, brick can also
                                                                     Hand tamper                   Eye protection
be mortared to the edge of a concrete slab for a
decorative finish (see pages 70 to 73 and 160 to 163).

    Brick Edging Configurations ~

     Brick soldier edging            Brick set on long edges    Brick set on faces, perpendicular or parallel to the
                                                                patio surface

I How to Install Brick Paver Edging

Excavate the edge of the patio or walkway site using a          Set the edging bricks into the trench after installing the
flat shovel to create a clean, vertical edge. The edge of the   gravel subbase and landscape fabric. If applicable, use your
soil (and sod) will support the outsides of the bricks. For     layout strings to keep the bricks in line and to check for the
edging with bricks set on-end, dig a narrow trench along the    proper height. Backfill behind the bricks with soil and tamp
perimeter of the site, setting the depth so the tops of the     well as you secure the bricks in place. Install the patio surface
edging bricks will be flush with the paving surface (or just    material. Tap the tops of the bricks with a rubber mallet and a
above the surface for loose materials).                         short 2 x 4 to leve l them with one another (inset).

126 • COMPLETE GUIDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I stone Edging Cut stone or dressed stone makes better edging than flagstone, which often has jagged edges that create an Trimming Stone ~ uneven border. Semi-dressed stone, with one or more flat sides, is a good option for a more natural look. Trim irregular stones for a tight fit: first score a cutting line with a small stone chisel and maul, then complete the cut with a pitching chisel. Use a pointing chisel or the pick end of a mason’s hammer to knock off small bumps and smooth rough edges. Tools & Materials ~ Rubber mallet Eye and ear Maul protection Stone chisel Work gloves Pitching chisel Mason’s hammer Pointing chisel Shovel Garden spade Gravel base Edging stones Landscape fabric Sand

I How to Install stone Edging

Excavate the patio or walkway site and dig a perimeter Backfill behind the stones with soil and tamp with a shovel trench to accommodate the stone edging. Add the landscape handle or a board to secure the stones in the trench. If desired, fabric and then a gravel base, as required. Place each stone fill the spaces between stones with sand or soil to help lock into the trench and tap it with a rubber mallet to set it into the them together. gravel. Use your layout strings to keep the edging in line and at the proper height.

                                                                                                                   Patio Projects •   127

I Concrete Curb Edging
Poured concrete edging is perfect for curves and
custom shapes, especially when you want a continuous
border at a consistent height. Keeping the edging low to
the ground (about one inch above grade) makes it work
well as a mowing strip, in addition to a patio or walkway
border. Use fiber-reinforced concrete mix, and cut
control joints into the edging to help control cracking.

     Tools & Materials ~
     Rope or garden hose          Concrete edger
     Excavation tools             I X I wood stakes
     Mason's string               1'4" hardboard
     Hand tamp                    I" wood screws
     Maul                         Fiber-reinforced
     Circular saw                     concrete
     Drill                        Acrylic concrete
     Concrete mixing                  sealer
      tools                       Eye and ear
     Margin trowel                    protection
     Wood concrete                Work gloves                     Concrete edging draws a sleek, smooth line between
      float                                                       surfaces in your yard and is especially effective for curving
                                                                  paths and walkways.

I How to Install Concrete Curb Edging

Layout the contours of the edging           Dig a trench between the layout lines        Stake along the edges of the trench,
using a rope or garden hose. For straight   8" wide (or 3" wider than the finished       using 1 x 1 x 12" wood stakes. Drive a
runs, use stakes and mason's string to      curb width) at a depth that allows for a     stake every 18" along each side edge.
mark the layout. Make the curb at least     4"-thick (minimum) curb at the desired
5" wide.                                    height above grade. Compact the soil to
                                            form a flat, solid base.

128 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Build the form sides by fastening 4”-wide strips of Va ” Add spacers inside the form to maintain a consistent width. hardboard to the insides of the stakes using 1” wood screws. Cut the spacers from 1 x 1 to fit snugly inside the form. Set the Bend the strips to follow the desired contours. spacers along the bottom edges of the form at 3-ft. intervals.

Fill the form with concrete mixed to a firm, workable Tool the concrete: once the bleed water disappears (see page consistency. Use a margin trowel to spread and consolidate 90), smooth the surface with a wood float. Using a margin trowel, the concrete. cut 1”-deep control joints across the width of the curb at 3-ft. intervals. Tool the side edges of the curb with an edger. Allow to cure. Seal the concrete, as directed, with an acrylic concrete sealer, and let it cure for 3 to 5 days before removing the form.

                                                                                                             Patio Projects •   129

I Landscape Timber Edging
Pressure-treated landscape or cedar timbers make
attractive, durable edging that's easy to install. Square-
edged timbers are best for geometric pavers like brick
and cut stone, while loose materials and natural
flagstone look best with rounded or squared timbers.
Choose the size of timber depending on how bold you
want the border to look.

     Tools & Materials ~
     Excavation tools             Landscape fabric
     Plate compactor              Sand (optional)
       (available for rent)       Landscape timbers
     Maul                           (pressure-treated
     Reciprocating saw              or rot-resistant
       with wood-cutting            species only)
       and metal-cutting          Y2"-diameter (#4)
       blades, circular             rebar
       saw, or handsaw            Eye and ear
     Drill and 1;2 " bit            protection
                                                                   lumber or timber edging can be used with any patio
     Compacted gravel                                              surface material. Here, this lumber edging is not only
                                                                   decorative, it also holds all of the loose material in place.

I How to Install Timber Edging

During the site excavation, dig a perimeter trench for the         Drill %" holes through each timber, close to the ends and
timbers so they will install flush with the top of the patio or    every 24" in between. Cut a length of V2"-diameter (#4) rebar at
walkway surface (or just above the surface for loose material).    24" for each hole using a reciprocating saw and metal-cutting
Add the compacted gravel base, as required, including a 2 to 4"    blade. Set the timbers in the trench and make sure they lie
layer in the perimeter trench. Cut timbers to the desired length   flat. Use your layout strings as guides for leveling and setting
using a reciprocating saw with a long wood-cutting blade, a        the height of the timbers. Anchor the timbers with the rebar,
circular saw, or a handsaw.                                        driving the bar flush with the wood surface.

130 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Lumber Edging Dimension lumber makes for an inexpensive edging material and a less-massive alternative to landscape Flagstone Edging timbers; 2 X 4 or 2 X 6 lumber works well for most board patios and walkways. Use only pressure-treated
lumber rated for ground contact or all-heart redwood or cedar boards to prevent rot. For the stakes, use pressure-treated lumber, since they will be buried anyway and appearance is not a concern.

 Tools & Materials ~
 Excavation tools              Compacted gravel
 Circular saw                  Landscape fabric
 Compactable gravel            Sand
 Drill                         2 W' galvanized deck
 2x lumber for edging            screws
 2 X 4 lumber for              Eye and ear
   stakes                        protection
 Wood preservative                                             Wood edging is a popular choice for simple flagstone or
                                                               paver walkways and for patios with a casual look.

I How to Install Lumber Edging

Excavate the patio site. and dig a perimeter trench for Fasten the boards to the stakes with pairs of 2%” deck the boards so they will install flush with the top of the patio screws. Where boards meet at corners and butt joints, fasten surface (or just above the surface for loose material). Add the them together with screws. Use your layout strings as guides gravel base, as required, including a 2 to 4” layer of gravel in for leveling and setting the height of the edging. Backfill behind the trench. Cut the edging boards to length, and seal the ends the edging to support the boards and hide the stakes. with wood preservative. Cut 2 x 4 stakes about 16” long. Set the edging boards in the trench and drive a stake close to the ends of each board and every 24” in between.

                                                                                                                  Patio Projects •   131

I Sandset Brick Patio raditional cl~y brick pavers set in sand make for T one of the sImplest yet most rewarding patio projects. The installation process is straightforward Tools & Materials ~ and, because there’s no mortar involved, you can Tape measure Professional-grade complete the work at your own pace. The overall Circular saw landscape fabric installation time depends on the patio’s design. Drill U-shaped wire Square-edged patios require fewer cuts and Excavation tools stakes (optional) thus less time than curved designs. But if you want Mason’s string Rigid paver edging something out of the ordinary, sandset brick is a good Stakes 1” -dia. pipe material to work with- the small units are perfect for Line level Coarse sand making curves and custom features; even if you have a Plate compactor Straight 2 X 4 lot of cuts, you can make them quickly and accurately (available for rent) W’ hardboard with a rented masonry saw. Hand tamp PI)“,yood scrap To pave with any of the classic patterns, such 4-ft. level Paver joint sand as running bond or herringbone, you’ll start at one Rubber mallet Rake corner of your patio border or edging. To ensure Push broom Trowel accurate layout, check that the sides of the edoino Brick paver units Masonry saw b b

form a 90-degree angle at the starting corner. If you're                 Lumber (2 X 2,               Eye and ear
not using edging or any kind of formal border, set up                        2 X 4)                     protection
mason's strings to guide the brick placement.                            2 \/2" drywall screws        Maul
     If you go with clay brick without spacing lugs, use                 Compactable gravel           Galvanized spikes
spacers cut from a sheet of 1fs"-thick hardboard to help                 Work gloves                     (for edging)
set accurate sand-joint gaps as you lay the units.

Brick pavers set in sand create a classic patio surface that's more casual than mortared pavers. The inherent flexibility of the
sandset finish allows for easy repair and maintenance or changes in the design over time. It also creates good drainage.

132 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Install a Sandset Brick Patio

Set up batterboards and layout strings in a square or rectangle that’s about 1 ft. Remove all sod and vegetation larger than the excavation area (see pages 40 to 45 for detailed steps on layout and inside the area, reserving healthy sod for site preparation). Measure to make sure the string layout is square, and set the strings patching in around the finished patio. to follow a ‘Is” per foot downward slope in the desired direction using a line level for guidance. Mark the excavation corners with stakes. The edges of the excavation should extend about 6” beyond the finished patio footprint.

:::I ------11----·~

Excavate the area to a depth that Add an even 3”-layer of compactable Install a layer of high-quality landscape allows for a 6”-thick gravel subbase, a 1”- gravel over the entire site, and then fabric. Overlap rows of fabric by at least layer of sand, and the paver thickness; tamp with a plate compactor. Repeat 6”. If desired, pin the fabric in place with account for the desired height of the with another 3”-layer. The completed 6” u-shaped wire stakes. finished surface above the surrounding gravel base prior to compacting must be ground. Use cross strings and a story smooth and flat, and it must follow the pole to check the depth as you work. slope of the layout strings. (continued)

                                                                                                                    Patio Projects •   133

Install rigid paver edging along two adjacent sides of the           Add a 1"-thick layer of coarse sand. Smooth it out with a
patio area, creating a perfect 90° corner. Option: If you've laid    rake so it just covers the pipes. Dampen the sand with water,
out the pavers and taken precise measurements, you can               then pack it down lightly with a hand tamp.
install edging along three or four sides of the patio, as desired.
Trim the fabric along the back of the edging. Lay down lengths
of 1"-dia . pipe in parallel lines about 3 to 6 ft. apart.

    \8

Screed the sand perfectly flat using a straight, long 2 X 4:         Fill the depression left by the pipe with sand. and then
rest the board on top of the pipes, and pull it backward with        smooth it out with a short board or a trowel. Tamp the area
a side-to-side sawing motion. Fill in low spots with sand as         with the hand tamp, and smooth again as needed so the
you work. Dampen, tamp, and screed the sand again until the          filled-in area is perfectly flat. Note: Repeat this step as needed
surface is smooth and flat and firmly packed. Remove the             during the paving process.
pipe(s) in the area where you will begin the paving.

134 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

                                                                                                         Field units

                                                                                                  Border units

Begin setting the border bricks, starting at the right-angle Set the first course of field brick. These bricks should be corner of the patio edging, using Va ” hardboard spacers if centered over the sand joints of the completed border row. necessary. Complete the border row that will be parallel to Use a mason’s string tied between two bricks to align the the first course of field brick, and continue several feet up the leading edges of the first-course bricks. After setting several perpendicular side edge. For gentle curves, use full bricks set bricks, tap them with a rubber mallet to bed them into the with slightly angled (wedge-shaped) sand joints; tighter curves sand layer. Complete the first field course, and then add some require cut bricks for a good fit. border units along the edge.

                                                                     Cutting Pavers & Bricks ~
                                                                    If your design requires cuts, use a masonry saw (tub
                                                                    saw). These water-lubricated cutting tools are available
                                                                    for rent at most building centers and stone yards.

Snug a piece of edging against the installed brick and anchor it in place. Note: Install the remaining edging as the paving progresses. Continue setting the brick using the mason’s string and spacers for consistent spacing and alignment.

                                                                                                                       (continued)

                                                                                                                  Patio Projects •   135

Check each 4-ft. section for level to make sure the bricks          Variation: If your patio design includes curves or rounded
are even across the top. Remove low or high bricks and add or      corners, mark bricks for cutting curves by holding each brick in
remove sand beneath to bring them flush with the surrounding       position and marking the desired cutting line onto the top face,
bricks. Work atop a plywood platform to prevent displacing the     then make the cuts with a masonry saw. For complex curves, it
bricks. Complete the paving.                                       might be easier to leave off the border bricks and run the field
                                                                   brick long at the edges, then mark the curved cuts onto the
                                                                   field brick (see page 148).

    14

Spread sand over the surface, then           Fill and tamp the sand joints one            Soak the surface with water and let
sweep the sand to fill the joints. sweep     or more times until the joints are           it dry. If necessary, fill and tamp again,
the surface clean, and then tamp the         completely filled after compaction.          then hose off the surface and let it dry.
surface with the plate compactor to          Sweep up any loose sand.
settle the sand in the joints and lock the
bricks in place.

136 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

More Paver Patterns ~

90° herringbone patterns require bricks that are twice 45° herringbone patterns require bricks that are twice as long as they are wide. Start the pattern with two bricks as long as they are wide. Starting from a precise 90° set in the corner of your edging (edging must form a corner, set the first row with two right-angle half-bricks. precise 90° angle). Add half-bricks next to the ends of the Complete the second row with two right-angle half-bricks first two bricks. Complete the next row, zigzagging full flanking a full brick. Begin each remaining field row bricks following the first row. Repeat the zigzag pattern for zig-zagging full bricks and finishing with right-angle half- the remaining field bricks, adding half-bricks at the ends bricks or trimmed bricks beveled at 45° . of rows as needed.

Basketweave patterns require bricks that are twice Pinwheels allow you to avoid cuts (on square or as long as they are wide. To avoid cuts (on square or rectangular patios) by installing edging on only two rectangular patios)’ you can install edging on only one adjacent sides, starting from a precise 90° corner. Install side and use it as a baseline for the paving. Install the the remaining edging after the paving is complete. Set remaining three sides of edging after all bricks are laid. each square pattern using four full bricks, as shown here, Snap a chalk line down the center of the sand bed, then fill the center cavity with a half-brick. For added making sure it is perpendicular (90°) to the baseline accent, the centerpiece can be a unique color, but it edging. Working from the centerline out for each section, must be the same thickness as the full bricks. Do not use lay bricks in a pyramid shape, setting 12 bricks total in a thinner brick for the center and compensate for the the first row, 8 in the second row, and 4 in the third row. difference with additional sand; the brick will eventually Complete the paving by adding to each row incrementally sink and create an uneven surface. to maintain the pyramid shape. This ensures that every row stems from the centerline to keep the layout straight.

                                                                                                               Patio Projects •   137

Walkways & Steps A walkwa y or path can do much more than provide a route for foot traffic. A path can be a versatile design element, creating an attractive border along a house, a patio, or landscape features. It can also become an attractive transition between two areas, such as a lawn and a planting bed. Walkways and paths are also effective at unifying spaces in the landscape. For example, imagine a back yard with a patio at one end, a beautiful flower garden at the other, and a solid swath of lawn in-between. By adding a footpath, you connect all of the areas. In terms of construction techniques and material, a walkway is essentially a patio in a different configuration. All of the same materials that make great patio surfaces are equally as suitable for walkways. In this chapter, you’ll find complete projects utilizing all major walkway materials, plus some you might not have thought of. As in the chapter on patio projects, there’s also a special section with tips for planning your walkway project and laying out the site (see pages 140 to 143).

In this chapter: • Designing & Laying • Flagstone Walkway Out Walkways & Steps • Simple Gravel Path • Sandset Brick Walkway • Pebbled Stepping • Poured Concrete Stone Path Walkway • Timber Garden Steps • Decorative Concrete Path • Flagstone Garden Steps • Mortared Brick Over a Concrete Path • Boardwalk

                                                    • 139

IDesigning & Laying Out Walkways & Steps

D    esigning and planning a new walkway starts with
     a careful assessment of how the path will be
used. Landscape designers commonly group outdoor
walkways into three main categories, according to use
and overall design goals.
     The first is a primary walkway: a high-traffic path
used by household members and visitors, such as a
walkway between the street and the home's main entry
door. A main path should provide the quickest and
easiest route from point A to point B. Any unnecessary
twists and turns are likely to be cross-cut by walkers,
leaving you with a less manicured path through the
yard. To allow two people to walk side-by-side, a main      As an important part of a home's curb appeal, a primary
path should be 42 to 48 inches wide. Surface materials      walkway should be styled to complement the house exterior
should be durable, slip-resistant, and easy to shovel (if   and street-side landscaping.
you live in a snowy climate), such as poured concrete,
pavers, or flat stones.
     A secondary walkway typically connects the house
to a patio or outbuilding or a patio to a well-used area
in the yard. A comfortable width for single-person
travel is 24 to 36 inches. Surfaces should be flat and
level underfoot and provide good drainage and slip-
resistance in all seasons.
     The third type, a tertiary path, is informal,
perhaps nothing more than a line of stepping stones
meandering through a flower garden or a simple
gravel path leading to a secluded seating area.
Design tertiary paths for a comfortable stride, with a
minimum width of 12 to 16 inches.
     Once you've established the design criteria for        secondary walkways can be a blend of practicality and
                                                            decoration. A gentle curve here and there adds interest
your walkway or path, spend some time testing the
                                                            without slowing travel too much.
size and configuration of the route to be sure it will
meet your needs. See page 143 for help with planning
a set of stairs for your walkway or landscape.

     Tools & Materials ~
     Stakes                   Lumber (1 x 2,
     Mason's string             1x4,2x4)
     Maul                     Level
     Plate compactor          Drill and drill bit
     Compactable gravel       Cardboard
     Excavation tools         Screws
     Line level               Eye and ear
     %" rope                    protection                  A tertiary path can be as rustic or creative as you like. It can
     Marking paint            Work gloves                   serve as an invitation to stroll through a garden or an access
                                                            path for tending plants-or both.

140 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Lay Out a straight walkway

Use temporary stakes and mason’s string to plan the Set up a new string layout to mark the precise borders walkway layout. Drive stakes at the ends of each section and of the finished walkway. Along the high edge of the walkway, at any corners, then tie the strings to the stakes to represent set the strings to the finished surface height. Use a line level to the edges of the finished path. Run a second set of strings 6” make sure the strings are level. Tip: For 90° turns, use the 3-4-5 outside the first lines. technique to set the strings accurately at 90° (see page 43).

Set the border strings lower for the slope. The finished Excavate the area within the string lines. First, cut sod along surface follows a downward slope of 1j, ” per foot on the the inside edge of the second string line. Remove all grass and opposite side of the walkway. Use a homemade slope gauge to plantings from the excavation area. Add the gravel subbase. set the height of the strings (see step 3, page 142). Fine-tune the gravel base to follow the slope setting, and prepare for the sand bed and/or surface material.

                                                                                                              Walkways (7 Steps •    141

I How to Lay Out Curving or Irregular walkways

Experiment with different sizes and shapes for the                    Mark the ground with marking paint, following the final
walkway using two lengths of 3// braided rope or a garden             outline of the ropes. Excavate the area 6" beyond the marked
hose. To maintain a consistent width, cut spacers from 1 x 2          outline (or as required for your choice of edging, see pages 124
lumber and use them to set the spacing between the rope               to 131). If desired, you can set up a string layout to guide the
outlines.                                                             installation of the gravel subbase (see page 141).

                                                                          Planning a Stepping
                                                                          Stone Path ~

                                                                          TO plan a simple stepping stone path, cut pieces
                                                                          of cardboard to roughly the same size as an average
Create a slope gauge for checking the slope of your gravel                stone you're using. Layout the pieces in the desired
base, edging, or surface material . Tape a level and a drill bit          route, then walk along the "stones" to make sure
to a straight 2 x 4 that's a little longer than the width of the          the spacing is comfortable for walking with a casual
walkway. The slope should be %" per foot: for a 2-ft. level, use a        stride. Leave the test pieces in place to guide the
W'-dia. bit or spacer; for a 4-ft.level, use a 1"-thick spacer. The       excavation and/or stone setting.
slope is correct when the level reads level.

142 • COMPLETE GUIDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Plan Landscape steps

Landscape steps are best with a Drive a tall stake into the ground at the base of the stairway site. Adjust the stake riser height (vertical dimension) of 6” so it is perfectly plumb. Drive a shorter stake at the top of the site. Position a long, or less and a tread depth (horizontal straight 1 x 4 or 2 x 4 against the stakes, with one end touching the ground next to dimension) of 11” or more. Plan to build the top stake. Adjust the 1 x 4 so it is level, then attach it to the stakes with screws. each tread with a downward slope of V/ For long spans, use a mason’s string instead of a board. per foot from back to front. Complete the following steps to calculate the tread and riser dimensions for your steps.

Measure from the ground to the Measure along the 1 x 4 between the stakes to find the total horizontal run of the bottom of the 1 x 4 to find the total stairway. Divide the total run by the number of steps to find the depth of each step rise of the stairway. Divide the total rise tread . If the depth is less than 11 ”, revise the step layout to extend the depth of the by the desired riser height to find the treads. number of steps you need. If the result contains a fraction, drop the fraction and divide the rise by the whole number to find the exact riser dimension.

                                                                                                                 Walkways (7 Steps •   143

I Sandset Brick Walkway S andset brick is a good choice of material for a walkway for the same reasons that make it a great patio surface-it’s easy to work with, it lends itself Tools & Materials ~ Tape measure Coarse sand equally well to traditional paving patterns and creative %” braided rope Landscape fabric custom designs, and it can be installed at a leisurely Marking paint Landscape staples pace because there’s no mortar or wet concrete involved. Excavation tools Brick paver units The timeless look of natural clay brick is especially Plate compactor Plastic patio edging well-suited to walkways, where the rhythmic patterns of Mason’s string IS” hardboard geometric lines create a unique sense of movement that Stakes Paver joint sand draws your eye down the path toward its destination. Hand tamp Eye and ear In this walkway project, all of the interior (field) 2- or 4-ft. level protection bricks are arranged in the installation area and then Drill bits \i\Tork gloves the curving side edges of the walk are marked onto the Rubber mallet 12” galvanized set bricks to ensure perfect cutting lines. After the edge Straightedge spikes bricks are cut and reset, border bricks are installed Trowel Maul followed by rigid paver edging to keep everything in Masonry saw place. This is the most efficient method for installing a Push broom curving path. Straight walkways can follow the standard 1 x 2 lumber process of installing the edging and border bricks (on one Compactable gravel or both sides of the path, as applicable) before laying the Straight 2 x 4 field brick, as is done in the brick patio project. Duct tape With standard brick, you’ll need to set the gaps with spacers cut from Ys” hardboard, as shown in this project.

A curving brick walkway can be as much a design statement as a course for easy travel. Curves require more time than straight
designs, due to the extra cutting involved, but the results can be all the more stunning.

144 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Install a Sandset Brick walkway

Layout the walkway curved edges using 314” braided rope (or use mason’s strings for straight sections; shown as variation). Cut 1 x 2 or 2 x 2 spacers to the desired path width and then place them in-between the ropes for consistent spacing. Mark the outlines along the inside edges of the ropes onto the ground with marking paint.

2

Excavate the area 6” outside of the marked lines along Spread out an even layer of compactable gravel- both sides of the path. Remove soil to allow for a 4”-thick enough for a 4”-thick layer after compaction. Grade the subbase of gravel, a 1” layer of sand, and the thickness of the gravel to follow a downward slope of %” per foot (most long brick pavers (minus the height of the finished paving above walkways slope from side to side, while shorter paths or the ground). The finished paving typically rests about 1” walkway sections can be sloped along their length). Use a aboveground for ease of lawn maintenance. Thoroughly tamp homemade slope gauge to screed the gravel smooth and to the area with a plate compactor. check the slope as you work (see step 3, page 142). Tamp the subbase thoroughly with the plate compactor, making sure the surface is flat and smooth and properly sloped . (continu ed)

                                                                                                             Walkways (7 Steps •   145

Cover the gravel base with professional-grade landscape           Spread a 1"-layer of coarse sand over the landscape fabric.
fabric, overlapping the strips by at least 6". If desired, tack   Screed the sand with a board so it is smooth, even, and flat.
the fabric in place with landscape staples.

Tamp the screeded sand with a hand tamper or a plate              Begin the paving at one end of the walkway, following the
compactor. Check the slope of the surface as you go.              desired pattern. Use Vs "-thick hardboard spacers in-between
                                                                  the bricks to set the sand-joint gaps. Tip: It's best to start the
                                                                  paving against a straightedge or square corner If your walkway
                                                                  does not connect to a patio or stoop, set a temporary 2 x 4
                                                                  with stakes at the end of the walkway to create a straight
                                                                  starting line.

146 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

                  Spacer

Option: If your walkway includes long straight sections Set the next few courses of brick, running them long over between curves, set up guidelines with stakes and mason’s the side edges. With the first few courses in place, tap the strings to keep the ends of the courses straight as you pave. bricks with a rubber mallet to bed them into the sand.

Layout the curved edges of the finished walkway using 3j, ” braided rope. Adjust the ropes as needed so that the cut bricks will be roughly symmetrical on both edges of the walkway. Also measure between the ropes to make sure the finished width will be accurate according to your layout. Trace along the ropes with a pencil to mark the cutting lines onto the bricks.

                                                                                                                     (continued)

                                                                                                            Walkways (7 Steps .    147

                                          Variation: Cut field bricks after
                                          installing the edging. Mark each brick
                                          for cutting by hiding it in position and
                                          drawing the cut line across the top face.

                                          Cut the bricks with a rented masonry
                                          saw (wet saw), following the instructions
                                          from the tool supplier. Make straight
                                          cuts with a single, full-depth cut. Curved
                                          cuts require multiple straight cuts made
                                          tangentially to the cutting line. After
                                          cutting a brick, reset it before cutting
                                          the next brick.

                                          Align the border bricks (if applicable)
                                          snug against the edges of the field
                                          paving. Use a straightedge or level to
                                          make sure the border units are flush
                                          with the tops of the field bricks. Set
                                          the border bricks with a rubber mallet.
                                          Dampen the exposed edges of the sand
                                          bed, and then use a trowel to slice away
                                          the edge so it's flush with the paving.

148 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Install rigid paver edging (bendable) (see page 125) or other edge material tight Fill and tamp the sand joints one against the outside of the walkway. or more times until the joints are completely filled . Sweep up any loose sand (see page 136).

Soak the surface with water and let it dry. Cover the edging sides with soil and sod or other material, as desired.

                                                                                                            Walkways (7 Steps •   149

IPoured Concrete Walkway I f you’ve always wanted to try your hand at creating with concrete, an outdoor walkway is a great project Tools & Materials ~ to start with. The basic elements and construction Drill, bits Y16” hardboard siding steps of a walkway are similar to those of a poured Circular saw Compactable gravel concrete patio or other landscape slab, but the smaller Mason’s string 6 x 6” 10/10 welded scale of a walkway makes it a much more manaaeable b Line level wire mesh (wwm) project for first-timers. Placing the wet concrete goes Excavation tools Tie wire faster, and you can easily reach the center of the 2- or 4-ft. level 2” bolsters surface for finishing from either side of the walkway. Plate compactor Isolation board Like a patio slab, a poured concrete walkway Heavy-duty wire and construction also makes a good foundation for mortared surface cutters or bolt adhesive materials, like pavers, stone, and tile. If that’s your cutters Release agent goal, be sure to account for the thickness of the Concrete mixing 4,000 psi concrete surface material when planning and laying out the tools (or as required by walkway height. A coarse broomed or scratched finish Shovel local code) on the concrete will help create a strong bond with the Hammer Clear polyethylene mortar bed of the surface material. Magnesium float sheeting The walkway in this project is a 4-inch-thick by Edger tool Eye and ear 26”-wide concrete slab with a broom finish for slip Groover tool protection resistance. It consists of two straight, 12-ft.-Iong runs Magnesium trowel Work gloves connected by a 90° elbow. After curing, the walkway Push broom 4” deck screws can be left bare for a classic, low-maintenance surface , Lumber (2 x 2, #3 rebar (optional) or it can be colored with a permanent acid stain 2 x 4) Wood stakes (see pages 96 to 97). When planning your walkway Drywall screws Tape measure project, consult your city’s building department for (212”, 312”) recommendations and construction requirements.

                                                                        Poured concrete walkways can be
                                                                        designed with straight lines, curves,
                                                                        or any angles you desire. The flat,
                                                                        hardwearing surface is ideal for frequently
                                                                        traveled paths and will stand up to
                                                                        heavy equipment and decades of snow
                                                                        shoveling.

150 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Sloping a walkway

Straight slope: Set the concrete Crowned slope: When a walkway does not run near the house foundation, you have form lower on one side of the walk- the option of crowning the surface so it slopes down to both sides. To make the crown, way so the finished surface is flat and construct a curved screed board by cutting a 2 x 2 and a 2 x 4 long enough to rest on slopes downward at a rate of 1/t” per both sides of the concrete form. Sandwich the boards together with a ‘It”-thick spacer foot. Always slope the surface away at each end, then fasten the assembly with 4” deck screws driven at the center and the from the house foundation or, when ends. Use the board to screed the concrete (see step 8, page 154). not near the house, toward the area best suited to accept water runoff.

I Reinforcing a walkway

As an alternative to the wire mesh reinforcement used in the following project, you can reinforce a walkway slab with metal rebar (check with the local building code requirements). For a 3-ft.-wide walkway, lay two sections of #3 rebar spaced evenly inside the concrete form. Bend the rebar as needed to follow curves or angles. Overlap pieces by 12” and tie them together with tie wire. Use wire bolsters to suspend the bar in the middle of the slab’s thickness.

                                                                                                              Walkways (7 Steps .   151

I How to Install a Poured Concrete walkway

Layout the precise edges of the finished walkway using stakes (or batterboards) and mason's string (see pages 40 to 45 for
additional help with setting up and using layout strings). Where possible, set stakes 12" or so outside of the walkway edges so
they're out of the way. Make sure any 90° corners are square using the 3-4-5 measuring technique. Leve l the strings, then lower
the strings on one side of the layout to create a downward slope of 'It" per foot (if the walkway will be crowned instead of sloped to
one side, keep all strings level with one another. Cut away the sod or other plantings 6" beyond the layout lines on all sides of the
site.

    2

Excavate the site for a 4- to 6"-thick gravel subbase, plus          Cover the site with a 4- to 6"-layer of gravel and screed the
any subgrade (below ground level) portion of the slab, as            surface flat, checking with a slope gauge to set the proper
desired. Measure the depth with a story pole (see page 43)           grade. Compact the gravel so the top surface is 4" below the
against the high-side layout strings, then use a slope gauge         finished walkway height. Reset the layout strings at the precise
(see page 142) to grade the slope. Tamp the soil thoroughly          height of the finished walkway.
with a plate compactor.

152 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Build the concrete form with straight 2 x 4 lumber so the Add curved strips made from Va- to %“-thick plywood inside faces of the form are aligned with the strings. Drive 2 x 4 hardboard or lauan to create curved corners, if desired. Secure stakes for reinforcement behind butt joints. Align the form with curved strips by screwing them to wood stakes. Recheck the the layout strings, and then drive stakes at each corner and gravel bed inside the concrete form, making sure it is smooth every 2 to 3 ft. in-between . Fasten the form to the stakes so the and properly sloped . top inside corner of the form boards are just touching the layout strings. The tops of the stakes should be just below the tops of the form.

Lay reinforcing wire mesh over the gravel base, keeping the Drop the concrete in pods, starting at the far end of the edges 1 to 2” from the insides of the form. Overlap the mesh walkway. Distribute it around the form by placing it (don’t strips by 6” (one square) and tie them together with tie wire. throw it) with a shovel. As you fill, stab into the concrete with Prop up the mesh on 2” bolsters placed every few feet and the shovel, and tap a hammer against the back sides of the tied to the mesh with wire. Install isolation board (see page 98) form to eliminate air pockets. Continue until the form is evenly where the walkway adjoins other slabs or structures. When filled, slightly above the tops of the form. you’re ready for the concrete pour, coat the insides of the form with a release agent or vegetable oil. (continued)

                                                                                                               Walkways (7 Steps •    153

Immediately screed the surface with a straight 2 x 4: two people pull the board backward in a side-to-side sawing motion
with the board resting on top of the form. As you work, shovel in extra concrete to fill low spots or remove concrete from high
spots, and re-screed. The goal is to create a flat surface that's level with the top of the form.

Float the concrete surface with a magnesium float, working        Use an edger to shape the side edges of the walkway
back and forth in broad arching strokes. Tip up the leading       along the wood form. Carefully run the edger back and forth
edge of the tool slightly to prevent gouging the surface. Stop    along the form to create a smooth, rounded corner, lifting the
floating once the surface is relatively smooth and has a wet      leading edge of the tool slightly to prevent gouging.
sheen. Be careful not to over-float, indicated by water pooling
on the surface. Allow the bleed water to disappear and the
concrete to harden sufficiently (see page 90).

154 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Mark the locations of the control joints onto the top Cut the control joints with a 1” groover guided by a straight edges of the form boards, spacing the joints at intervals 1V2 2 x 4 held (or fastened) across the form at the marked times the width of the walkway. locations. Make several light passes back and forth until the groove reaches full depth, lifting the leading edge of the tool to prevent gouging. Remove the guide board once each joint is complete. If desired, smooth out the marks made by the groover using a magnesium trowel.

Create a nonslip surface with a broom finish: starting at the Cure the concrete by misting the walkway with water, then far side edge of the walkway, steadily drag a broom backward covering it with clear polyethylene sheeting. Smooth out any over the surface in a straight line using a single pulling motion. air pockets (which can cause discoloration), and weight down Repeat in single, parallel passes (with minimal or no overlap), the sheeting along the edges. Mist the surface and reapply the and rinse off the broom bristles after each pass. The stiffer and plastic daily for 1 to 2 weeks. coarser the broom, the rougher the texture will be.

                                                                                                               Walkways (7 Steps •   155

IDecorative Concrete Path

A    well-made walkway or garden path not only stands
     up to years of hard use, it enhances the natural
landscape and complements a home's exterior features.
                                                                  steps for making any length of pathway, plus special
                                                                  techniques for making curves, adding a custom finish,
                                                                  or coloring the concrete to suit your personal design.
While traditional walkway materials like brick and
stone have always been prized for both appearance
and durability, most varieties are quite pricey and                    Tools & Materials ~
often difficult to install. As an easy and inexpensive
alternative, you can build a new concrete path using                     Excavation and site         Liquid concrete
manufactured forms. The result is a beautiful pathway                     preparation tools           colorant
that combines the custom look of brick or natural stone                  Concrete mold               Clear polyethylene
with all the durability and economy of poured concrete.                  Wheelbarrow or               sheeting
     Building a path is a great do-it-yourself project.                   mixing box                 Polymer-modified
Once you've laid out the path, you mix the concrete,                     Shovel                       jointing sand or
set and fill the form, then lift off the form to reveal the              Margin trowel or             mortar mix
finished design. After a little troweling to smooth the                   concrete finishing         Compactable
surfaces, you're ready to create the next section-using                   trowel                      gravel (optional)
the same form. Simply repeat the process until the                       Fiber-reinforced            Level
path is complete. Each form creates a section that's                      concrete mix               Broom or stiff
approximately two square feet using one 80-lb . bag of                   Work gloves                  brush
premixed concrete. This project shows you all the basic

Concrete path molds are available in a range of styles and decorative patterns. Coloring the wet concrete is a great way to add a
realistic look to the path design.

156 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Create a Straight or 90 Decorative Concrete Path 0

Prepare the project site by leveling the ground, removing Mix a batch of concrete for the first section, following the sod or soil as needed. For a more durable base, excavate product directions (see page 158 to add color, as we have the area and add 2 to 4” of compactable gravel. Grade and done here). Place the form at the start of your path and level compact the gravel layer so it is level and flat. See pages 140 it, if desired. Shovel the wet concrete into the form to fill each to 143 for detailed steps on layout and site preparation. cavity. Consolidate and smooth the surface of the form using a concrete margin trowel.

promptly remove the form, and then trowel the edges of the After removing each form, remember to trowel the edges section to create the desired finish (it may help to wet the trowel of the section to create the desired finish. Repeat until the path in water). For a nonslip surface, broom the section or brush it is finished. If desired, rotate the form 90° with each section to with a stiff brush. Place the form against the finished section and vary the pattern. Cure the path by covering it with polyethylene repeat steps 2 and 3 to complete the next section. sheeting for 5 to 7 days, lifting the plastic and misting the concrete with water each day. (continued)

                                                                                                                  Walkways (7 Steps •    157

                                                                       Custom Surfacing Tip ~

                                                                       Create custom surface finishes by pressing small stones
                                                                       or pea gravel into the wet concrete or by brushing on a
                                                                       layer of sand. Apply finish materials after the concrete
Fill walkway joints with sand or mortar mix to mimic the               has reached its initial set (thumb print hard) but is still
look of hand-laid stone or brick. sweep the sand or dry mortar
                                                                       damp-approximately one hour after placing.
into the section contours and spaces between sections. For
mortar, mist the joints with water so they harden in place.

     Coloring Your Concrete ~
     Adding colorant to the concrete mix
     is the easiest method and produces
     consistent results:

     1.   Combine liquid concrete colorant
          with water and mix into each
          bag-quantity of dry concrete mix,
          following the manufacturer's
          instructions. Blend thoroughly
          for consistent coloring, then
          add clean water to the mix, as
          needed, to achieve the proper
          consistency for pouring the
          concrete.
     2.   After placing and finishing the
          path sections, cure the concrete
          carefully to produce the best
          color quality. If curing conditions
          will be less than ideal, apply
          concrete sealer to ensure slow,        Coloring gives molded concrete a more natural-loOking finish and is great
          even curing and good coloring.         for blending your path or walkway into your landscape design.

158 • C OMPLET E GU lD E TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Create a Curved Decorative Concrete Path

After removing the form from a freshly poured section (see page 157, steps 1 through 3), reposition the form in the direction of the curve and press down to slice off the inside corner of the section (photo left). Trowel the cut edge (and the rest of the section) to finish. Pour the next section following the curve (photo right). Cut off as many sections as needed to complete the curve. Cure the path by covering it with plastic sheeting for 5 to 7 days, lifting the plastic and misting the concrete with water each day.

Sprinkle the area around the joint or joints between Mist the jointing sand with clean water, taking care not pave rs with polymer-modified jointing sand after the concrete to wash the sand out of the joint. Once the water dries, the has cured sufficiently so that the sand does not adhere. Sweep polymers in the mixture will have hardened the sand to look the product into the gap to clean the paver surfaces while like a mortar joint. Refresh as needed. filling the gap.

                                                                                                               Walkways (7 Steps •   159

IMortared Brick Over a Concrete Path I f you’re looking to makeover an aging concrete walkway, you can’t beat the looks and performance of (approximately 2%”) and thinner (approximately 11’2 ”) thicknesses. Concrete pavers are installed mortared brick paving. The flat, finished surface is ideal using the same techniques, and they come in a range for both heavy foot traffic and garden equipment and of sizes, thicknesses, and shapes. In any case, be is nearly as maintenance-free as plain concrete, while sure to choose straight-sided pavers, as irregular or the formal elegance of brick is a dramatic upgrade over interlocking shapes make for unnecessarily tricky a timeworn, gray slab. If your plans include new paving mortar work. Consult with knowledgeable staff at your over an old concrete patio, a walkway is also the perfect masonry supplier to learn about paver materials and opportunity to develop your skills before tackling the mortar suitable for your project and the local climate. larger patio surface-the materials and techniques are the same for both applications. Start your walkway project with a careful examination of the concrete path: as the structural foundation of your new surface, the concrete must be stable and relatively Tools & Materials ~ flat. Large cracks and uneven surfaces indicate movement Shovel Brick or concrete of the concrete structure, often due to problems with the Mortar mixing tools pavers gravel base and/or inadequate drainage under the slab. Mason’s trowel Yz” plywood Since these ailments won’t go away with the new paving, V-shaped mortar tool Straight 2 x 4 you can either decide to replace the old concrete with a (jointing tool) or 2 x 6 newly poured walkway or consider a mortarless surface, Rubber mallet Coarse rag such as sandset brick. With that in mind, minor surface 4-ft. level Clear polyethylene problems, such as fine cracks and cosmetic flaws, will not Mortar bag sheeting likely affect new mortared paving. Type S mortar (or Eye and ear When shopping for pavers, consider the added other recom- protection height of the new surface, the paving pattern you mended type) desire, and the material of the pavers themselves. Natural clay brick pavers are available in standard

                                                                               The natural, warm color of brick is a
                                                                               dramatic yet DIY-friendly upgrade for a
                                                                               tired looking gray slab.

160 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Install Mortared Brick over a Concrete Path

Dig a trench around the concrete path, slightly wider than the Sweep the old concrete, then hose off the surface and thickness of one paver. Dig the trench so it is about 3%” below sides with water to clear away dirt and debris. Soak the pavers the concrete surface (for standard-sized pavers). with water before mortaring; dry pavers absorb moisture, weakening the mortar strength . Mix a small batch of mortar according to manufacturer’s directions. For convenience, place the mortar on a scrap of plywood.

                                                                4

Install edging bricks by applying a %“-Iayer of mortar to Finish the joints on the edging bricks with a V-shaped mortar the side of the concrete slab and to one side of each brick. tool, then mix and apply a W’-thick bed of mortar to one end Set bricks into the trench, against the concrete. Brick edging of the sidewalk using a trowel. Mortar hardens very quickly, so should be V/ higher than the thickness of the brick pavers. work in sections no larger than 4 sq. ft. (continued)

                                                                                                           Walkways (7 Steps •   161

Make a screed board for smoothing the mortar by notching               Lay the paving bricks one at a time into the mortar,
the ends of a straight 2 x 4 or 2 x 6 to fit between the edging        maintaining a W' gap between pavers. (A piece of scrap
bricks. The depth of the notches should equal the thickness            plywood works well as a spacing guide.) Set the pavers by
of the pavers. Drag the screed across the mortar bed until the         tapping them lightly with a rubber mallet.
mortar is smooth.

    7

As each section of pavers is completed, check with a                   When all the pavers are installed, use a mortar bag to fill
straightedge or level to make sure the tops of the pavers are          the joints between the pavers with fresh mortar. Work in 4-sq.-
even. If a paver is too high, press it down or tap it with the         ft. sections, and avoid getting mortar on the tops of the pavers.
rubber mallet; if too low, lift it out and butter its back face with
mortar and reset it.

162 • C OMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Use a v-shaped mortar tool to finish the joints as you Let the mortar dry for a few hours, then scrub the pavers complete each 4 sq.-ft. section. For best results, finish the with a coarse rag and water. Cover the walkway with longer joints first, then the shorter joints. Use a trowel to polyethylene sheeting and let the mortar cure for at least 24 remove excess mortar. hours. Remove sheeting, but do not walk on the pavers for at least three days.

Variation: As an alternative to paving over an entire walkway (if the old concrete still looks good), add a decorative touch with a border of mortared pavers along the edges. The same treatment is great for dressing up the exposed edges of a concrete patio, stoop, or steps. To install edging along a walkway, follow the basic techniques shown in steps 1 to 4 on page 161, but set the pavers flush with the walkway surface. Position the pavers horizontally or vertically, depending on the height of the walkway and the desired effect. After the pavers are set and tooled, follow step 10 above to complete the job.

                                                                                                               Walkways (7 Steps •   163

IFlagstone Walkway

N     atural flagstone is an ideal material for creating
      landscape floors. It's attractive and durable and
blends well with both formal and informal landscapes.
Although flagstone structures are often mortared, they
can also be constructed with the sand-set method.
Sand-setting flagstones is much faster and easier than
setting them with mortar.                                         Sand
      There are a variety of flat, thin sedimentary                                                               Flagstone
                                                                                                                  pavers
rocks that can be used for this project. Home and                 Landscape
garden stores often carry several types of flagstone,             fabric

but stone supply yards usually have a greater variety.               Compact able
                                                                     gravel                                2 x 6 wood edging
Some varieties of flagstone cost more than others, but
there are many affordable options. When you buy the
flagstone for your project, select pieces in a variety of
sizes from large to small. Arranging the stones for your             Tools & Materials ~
walkway is similar to putting together a puzzle, and
you'll need to see all the pieces laid out.                          Excavation tools               2 x 6 pressure-
      The following example demonstrates how to build                Circular saw with                treated lumber
a straight flagstone walkway with wood edging. If                      masonry blade                Deck screws
you'd like to build a curved walkway, select another                 Power drill                    Compactable gravel
edging material, such as brick or cut stone. Instead of              Masonry chisel                 Flagstone pavers
filling gaps between stones with sand, you might want                Maul                           Eye and ear
to fill them with topsoil and plant grass or some other              Rubber mallet                    protection
ground cover between the stones. See pages 140 to                    Landscape fabric               Work gloves
143 for help with designing a walkway and preparing                  Sand
the project site.

Flagstone walkways combine durability with beauty and work we ll for casual or formal landscapes.

164 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Build a Flagstone walkway

Layout, excavate, and prepare the Test-fit the stones over the walkway base, finding an attractive arrangement base for the walkway. Form edging that limits the number of cuts needed. The gaps between the stones should range by installing 2 x 6 pressure-treated between 3/8 and 2” wide. Use a pencil to mark the stones for cutting, then remove the lumber around the perimeter of the stones and place them beside the walkway in the same arrangement. Score along pathway. Drive stakes on the outside of the marked lines with a circular saw and masonry blade set to Va” blade depth. Set a the edging, spaced 12” apart. The tops piece of wood under the stone, just inside the scored line. Use a masonry chisel and of the stakes should be below ground maul to strike along the scored line until the stone breaks. leve l. Drive galvanized screws through the edging and into the stakes.

Lay overlapping strips of landscape Beginning at one corner of the Fill the gaps between the stones with fabric over the walkway base and walkway, lay the flagstones onto the sand. (Use topsoil, if you’re going to spread a 2”-layer of sand over it. Make sand base. Repeat the arrangement you plant grass or ground cover between a screed board from a short 2 x 6, created in step 2, with 3/8 - to 2”-wide the stones.) Pack sand into the gaps, notched to fit inside the edging. Pull the gaps between stones. If necessary, add then spray the entire wa lkway with screed from one end of the walkway or remove sand to level the stones, then water to help settle the sand. Repeat to the other, adding sand as needed to set them by tapping them with a rubber until the gaps are completely filled and create a level base. mallet or a length of 2 x 4. tightly packed with sand.

                                                                                                            Walkways (7 Steps •   165

Loose materials can be used as filler between solid surface materials, like flagstone, or laid as the primary ground cover, as
shown here.

166 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Simple Gravel Path L oose-fill gravel pathways are perfect for stone gardens, casual yards, and other situations where a hard surface is not required. The material is debris that will be difficult to remove from the gravel. Organic matter left on gravel paths will eventually rot into compost that will support weed growth. inexpensive, and its fluidity accommodates curves and A base of compactable gravel under the surface irregular edging. Since gravel may be made from any material keeps the pathway firm underfoot. For best rock, gravel paths may be matched to larger stones in results, embed the surface gravel material into the the environment, tying them in to your landscaping. paver base with a plate compactor. This prevents the The gravel you choose need not be restricted to stone, base from showing through if the gravel at the surface either. Industrial and agricultural byproducts, such as is disturbed. An underlayment of landscape fabric cinder and ashes, walnut shells, seashells, and ceramic helps stabilize the pathway and blocks weeds, but if fragments may also be used as path material. you don’t mind pulling an occasional dandelion and For a more stable path, choose angular or jagged are building on firm soil, it can be omitted. gravel over rounded materials. However, if your preference is to stroll throughout your landscape barefoot, your feet will be better served with smoother stones, such as river rock or pond pebbles. With Tools & Materials ~ stone, look for a crushed product in the !4 to %” range. Angular or smooth, stones smaller than that can be Mason’s string Edging tracked into the house, while larger materials are Hose or rope Spikes uncomfortable and potentially hazardous to walk on. Marking paint Professional-grade If it complements your landscaping, use light-colored Excavation tools landscape fabric gravel, such as buff limestone. Visually, it is much Garden rake Compactable gravel easier to follow a light pathway at night because it Plate compactor Dressed gravel reflects more moonlight. Sod stripper or Eye and ear Stable edging helps keep the pathway gravel from power sod cutter protection migrating into the surrounding mulch and soil. When Wood stakes Work gloves integrated with landscape fabric, the edge keeps Lumber (l x 2, Circular saw invasive perennials and trees from sending roots and 2 x 4) Maul shoots into the path. Do not use gravel paths near plants Straight 2 x 4 and trees that produce messy fruits, seeds, or other

I Construction Details 2+ inches of gravel forms the walking surface Staked metal “U~~'''!oI, separates dirt from gravel


   •                                        •
                         -                         •                    •       •

                                Landscape fabric overlaps               2+ inches of paver base
                                edging to keep out roots                forms a bed for the
                                and rhizomes                            walking surface

                                                                                                    Walkways (7 Steps •   167

     Make a Spacer Gauge ~

     To ensure that the edges of the pathway are exactly parallel, create a spacer bar and use it as a guide to install the
     edging. Start with a piece of 2 x 4 that's a bit longer than the path width. Near one end, cut a notch that will fit snugly
     over the edging. Trim the spacer so the distance from the notch to the other end is the planned width of the pathway.

I How to Create a Gravel pathway

Layout one edge of the path excavation. Use a section of               Remove sod in the walkway area using a sod stripper or
hose or rope to create curves, and use stakes and string to            a power sod cutter (see option, at right). Excavate the soil to a
indicate straight sections (see pages 140 to 143 for detailed          depth of 4 to 6". Measure down from a 2 x 4 placed across the
steps on designing and laying out a walkway). Cut 1 x 2 spacers        path bed to fine-tune the excavation. Grade the bottom of
to set the path width and establish the second pathway edge;           the excavation flat using a garden rake. Note: If mulch will be
use another hose and/or more stakes and string to layout the           used outside the path, make the excavation shallower by the
other edge. Mark both edges with marking paint.                        depth of the mulch. compact the soil with a plate compactor.

168 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Option: Use a power sod cutter to strip grass from your Lay landscaping fabric from edge to edge, lapping over the pathway site. Available at most rental centers and large home undisturbed ground on either side of the path. On straight centers, sod cutters excavate to a very even depth. The cut sections, you may be able to run parallel to the path with sod can be replanted in other parts of your lawn. a single strip; on curved paths, it’s easier to lay the fabric perpendicular to the path. Overlap all seams by 6”.

Install edging over the fabric. Shim the edging with small Stone or vertical-brick edges may be set in deeper stones, if necessary, so the top edge is %” above grade (if the trenches at the sides of the path. Place these on top of the path passes through grass) or 2” above grade (if it passes fabric also. You do not have to use additional edging with paver through a mulched area). Secure the edging with spikes. To edging, but metal (or other) edging will keep the pavers from install the second edge, use a 2 x 4 spacer gauge that’s been wandering. notched to fit over your edging (see page 168). (continued)

                                                                                                           Walkways (7 Steps •   169

Trim excess fabric, then backfill behind the edging with        Add a 2- to 4"-thick layer of compactable gravel over the
dirt and tamp it down carefully with the end of a 2 x 4. This   entire pathway. Rake the gravel flat. Then, spread a thin layer of
secures the edging and helps it to maintain its shape.          your surface material over the base gravel.

Tamp the base and surface gravel together using a plate compactor. Be careful not to disturb or damage the edging with
the compactor.

170 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Fill in the pathway with the remaining surface gravel. Drag a Set the edging brick flu sh with the gravel using a mallet 2 x 4 across the tops of the edging using a sawing motion, to and 2 x 4. level the gravel flu sh with the edging.

Tamp the surface again using the plate compactor or a Rinse off the pathway with a hose to wash off dirt and dust hand tamper. Compact the gravel so it is slightly below the and bring out the true colors of the materials. top of the edging. This will help keep the gravel from migrating out of the path .

                                                                                                             Walkways (7 Steps •   171

Stepping stones blend beautifully into many types of landscaping, including rock gardens, ponds, flower or vegetable gardens, or
manicured grass lawns.

172 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Pebbled Stepping Stone Path A steppin g stone path is both a practical and appealing way to traverse a landscape. With large stones as foot landings, you are free to use pretty In the project featured here, landscape edging is used to contain the loose infill material (small aggregate), however a stepping stone path can also be much any type of fill material in between. You could effective without edging. For example, setting a series even place stepping stones on individual footings over of steppers directly into your lawn and letting the lawn ponds and streams, making water the temporary infill grass grow between them is a great choice as well. that surrounds the stones. The infill does not need to follow a narrow path bed, either. Steppers can be used to cross a broad expanse of gravel, such as a Zen gravel panel or a smaller graveled opening in an alpine Tools & Materials ~ rock garden. Stepping stones in a path serve two purposes: Mason’s string Thick steppers or they lead the eye, and they carry the traveler. In both Hose or rope broad river rocks cases, the goal is rarely fast, direct transport, but more Marking paint with one flat face of a relaxing stroll that’s comfortable, slow-paced, and Sod stripper ~ to 1’2 ” pond above all, natural. Arrange the stepping stones in your Excavation tools pebbles walking path according to the gaits and strides of the Hand tamp 2 Y2”-dia. river rock people that are most likely to use the pathway. Keep in Wood stakes Eye and ear mind that our gaits tend to be longer on a utility path 1 x 2 lumber protection than in a rock garden. Straight 2 x 4 Work gloves Sometimes steppers are placed more for visual Edging Level effect, with the knowledge that they will break the Landscape fabric Rake pacing rule with artful clusters of stones. Clustering Coarse sand is also an effective way to slow or congregate walkers near a fork in the path or at a good vantage point for a striking feature of the garden.

 Choosing Steppers ~
 Select beefy stones (minimum
 2Y2 to 3Y2" thick) with at least
 one flat side. Thinner stepping
 stones tend to sink into the
 pebble infill. Stones that are
 described as stepping stones
 usually have two flat faces. For
 the desired visual effect on this
 project, we chose steppers
 and 12 to 24" wide fieldstones
 with one broad, flat face (the
 rounded face is buried in the
 ground, naturally).

                                                                                                  Walkways (7 Steps •   173

I How to Make a Pebbled Stepping stone Path
                                        Excavate and prepare a bed for the
                                        path as you would for the gravel pathway
                                        (see pages 169 to 171), but use coarse
                                        building sand instead of compactable
                                        gravel for the base layer. Screed the sand
                                        flat so it's 2" below the top of the edging.
                                        Do not tamp the sand. Tip: Low-profile
                                        plastic landscape edging is a good choice
                                        because it does not compete with the
                                        pathway.

                                        Moisten the sand bed, then position the
                                        stepping stones in the sand, spacing them
                                        for comfortable walking and the desired
                                        appearance. As you work, place a 2 x 4
                                        across three adjacent stones to make
                                        sure they are even with one another. Add
                                        or remove sand beneath the steppers, as
                                        needed, to stabilize and level the stones.

                                        Pour in a layer ot larger intill stones
                                        (2" -dia. river rock is seen here). Smooth
                                        the stones with a garden rake. The infill
                                        should be below the tops of the stepping
                                        stones. Reserve about % of the larger
                                        diameter rocks.

174 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Add the smaller infill stones, that will migrate down and Scatter the remaining large infill stones across the fill in around the larger infill rocks. To help settle the rocks, infill area so they float on top of the other stones. Eventually, you can tamp lightly with a hand tamper, but don’t get too they will sink down lower in the pathway and you will aggressive-the larger rocks might fracture easily. need to lift and replace them selectively to maintain the original appearance.

I Variations

Move from a formal space to a less orderly area of your Combine concrete stepping pavers with crushed landscape by creating a pathway that begins with closely rock or other small stones for a path with a cleaner, more spaced steppers on the formal end and gradually transforms contemporary look. Follow the same basic techniques used into a mostly-gravel path on the casual end, with only on pages 173 to 174, setting the pavers first, then filling in- occasional clusters of steppers. between with the desired infill material(s).

                                                                                                               Walkways (7 Steps •   175

Here we use gravel (small aggregate river rock), a common surface for paths and rock gardens, for the tread surfaces.
Other tread surfaces include bricks, cobbles, and stepping stones. Even large flagstones can be fit to the tread openings.

176 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Timber Garden Steps Tools & Materials ~ Supplies for Framing square Drill and %” bit with T imberframed steps provide a delightfully simple and structurally satisfying way to manage slopes. They are usually designed with shallow steps that have long runs Timber & Gravel Steps: Marking paint long shaft Sledgehammer and large tread areas, that can be filled with a variety of Mason’s string Wood stakes materials. Two popular methods are shown here- gravel Level Compactable gravel and with poured concrete. Other tread surfaces you Excavation tools 2 x 4 lumber might consider are bricks, cobbles, and stepping stones. Hand tamp Landscape timbers Even large flagstones can be cut to fit the tread openings. Circular saw %” landscape spikes Timber steps needn’t follow the straight and Speed square Gravel narrow, either. You can vary the lengths of the left and right returns to create swooping helical steps that suggest spiral staircases. Or, increase the length of both returns to create a broad landing on which to set secured to a timber cleat at the base of the slope, while pots or accommodate a natural flattening of the slope. the concrete-filled steps are anchored at the base with Want to soften the steps? Use soil as a base near the long sections of pipe driven into the ground. sides of the steps and plant herbs or ground cover. Or Designing steps is an important part of the process. for a spring surprise, plant daffodils under a light pea Determine the total rise and run of the hill and translate gravel top dressing at the edges of the steps. this into a step size that conforms to this formula: 2x Timber steps don’t require a frost footing, because (rise) + run = 26”. Your step rise will equal your timber the wooden joints flex with the earth rather than crack width, that can range from approximately 3 W’ (for 4 x like solid concrete steps would. However, it’s a good idea 4 timbers or 4 x 6 on the flat) to 7W’ or 7W’ (for 8 x 8 to include some underground anchoring to keep loose timbers). See page 143 for more help with designing and muddy soil from pushing the steps forward. To provide laying out landscape steps. As with any steps, be sure to longterm stability, the gravel-filled steps shown here are keep the step size consistent so people don’t trip.

I How to Build Timber & Gravel Garden Steps

Install and level the timber cleat: mark the outline of the Create trenches filled with tamped gravel for the returns steps onto the ground using marking paint. Dig a trench for (the timbers running back into the hill, perpendicular to the the cleat at the base of the steps. Add 2 to 4” of compactable cleat and risers). The returns should be long enough to anchor gravel in the trench and compact it with a hand tamp. Cut the the riser and returns of the step above. Dig trenches back into cleat to length and set it into the trench. Add or remove gravel the hill for the returns and compact 2 to 4” of gravel into the beneath the cleat so it is level and its top is even with the trenches so each return will sit level on the cleat and gravel. surrounding ground or path surface.

                                                                                                             Walkways (7 Steps •   177

I Construction Details: Timber step Frames
                                                                                     Path edged and
                                                                Top tread integral   graded to meet
                                                                with path, no        top riser
                                                                returns used

        I
        I
        I
        I
        I
        I

        : ~,y-
     Total
     rise

                          Top of cleat
                          even with
                          finished
                          height of      Cleat
                                                 /
                          path

                                                      dge banding   ~~
                                                     with stakes

    Cutting Timbers ~
    Large landscape timbers
    (6 x 6" and bigger) can be cut
    accurately and squarely with
    a circular saw, even though
    the saw's cutting capacity
    isn't big enough to do the job
    completely. First, draw cutting
    lines on all four sides of the
    timber using a speed square
    as guide. Next, cut along the
    line on all four sides with the
    saw set for maximum blade
    depth. Finally, use a hand
    saw to finish the cut. For
    most DIYers, this will yield a
    straighter cut than saws that
    can make the cut in one pass,
    such as a reciprocating saw.

178 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Cut and position the returns and the first riser. Using a Excavate and add tamped gravel for the second set of 2 x 4 as a leve l extender, check to see if the backs of the returns. Cut and position the second riser across the ends of returns are level with each other and adjust by adding or the first returns, leaving the correct unit run between the riser removing gravel in the trenches. Drill four %“-dia. holes and faces. Note that only the first riser doesn’t span the full width fasten the first riser and the two returns to the cleat with spikes. of the steps. Cut and position the returns, check for leve l, then pre-drill and spike the second riser and returns to the returns below.

Build the remaining steps in the same fashion. As you Install the final riser. Typically, the last timber does not have work, it may be necessary to alter the slope with additional returns because its tread surface is integral with the path or excavating or backfilling (few natural hills follow a uniform su rrounding ground. The top of this timber should be slightly slope). Add or remove soil as needed along the sides of the higher than the ground. As an alternative, you can use returns steps so that the returns are exposed roughly equally on to contain pathway material at the top of the steps. both sides. Also, each tread should always be higher than the neighboring ground.

                                                                                                                          (continued)

                                                                                                                 Walkways (7 Steps •    179

Lay and tamp a base of compactable gravel in each step            Fill up the tread areas with gravel or other appropriate
tread area. Use a 2 x 4 as a tamper. For proper compaction,       material. Irregular crushed gravel offers maximum surface
tamp the gravel in 2" or thinner layers before adding more.       stability, while smooth stones, like the river rock seen here,
Leave about 2" of space in each tread for the surface material.   blend into the environment more naturally and feel better
                                                                  underfoot than crushed gravel and stone.

                                                                                       Create or improve pathways at the top
                                                                                       and bottom of the steps. For a nice effect,
                                                                                       build a loose-fill walkway using the same
                                                                                       type of gravel that you used for the steps.
                                                                                       Install a railing, if desired or if required by
                                                                                       the local building code.

180 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Build Timber & concrete Garden steps

Mark the sides of the step site with stakes and string. The Add the width of the timber (5”) to the tread depth, then stakes should be positioned at the front edge of the bottom measure back this distance for the stakes and drive additional step and the back edge of the top step. stakes to mark the back edge of the first step. Connect these stakes with string to mark the digging area for the first step.

Tools & Materials ~
Supplies for Timber          Wood stakes
   & Concrete Steps:         5 x 6 landscape timbers
Mason's string               1II pipe
Excavation tools             12 II galvanized spikes
Saw                          Plastic sheeting
Level                        Compactable gravel
Drill and 1 II space bit     2 x 4 lumber
  with bit extension         Premixed concrete
Maul                         Seed gravel (W')
Rake                         Burlap
Wheelbarrow
Hoe
Wood float
Concrete edging tool
Stiff brush

                                                          Excavate for the first step, creating a flat bed with a very
                                                          slight forward slope, no more than Va" from back to front. The
                                                          front of the excavation should be no more than 2" deep. Tamp
                                                          the soil firmly.
                                                                                                                (continued)

                                                                                                        Walkways (7 Steps •   181

Arrange the timbers to form the step frame and end nail              Set the timber frame in position. Use a carpenter's square
them together with 12" spikes.                                       to make sure the frame is square, and adjust as necessary. Drill
                                                                     two 1" guide holes in the front timber and the back timber, 1 ft.
                                                                     from the ends, using a spade bit and bit extension.

Anchor the steps to the ground by driving a 2V2-ft. length of        Build another step frame and position it in the excavation
3f," pipe through each guide hole until the pipe is flush with the   so the front timber is directly over the rear timber on the first
timber. When pipes are drive n, make sure the frame is level         frame. Nail the steps together with three 12" spikes, then drill
from side to side and has the proper forward pitch. Excavate         guide holes and drive two pipes through only the back timber
for the next step, making sure the bottom of the excavation is       to anchor the second frame.
even with the top edge of the installed timbers.

182 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Continue digging and installing the Staple plastic over the timbers to Pour a 2”-layer of compactable remaining frames until the steps reach protect them from wet concrete. Cut gravel subbase into each frame, and full height. The back of the last step away the plastic so it does not overhang use a 2 x 4 to smooth it out. should be at ground level. into the frame opening.

Mix concrete in a wheelbarrow, adding just enough water so Shovel concrete into the bottom frame, flush with the top the concrete holds its shape when sliced with a trowel. of the timbers. Work the concrete lightly with a garden rake to help remove air bubbles, but do not overwork the concrete. (continued)

                                                                                                          Walkways (7 Steps •   183

Screed the concrete by dragging a 2 x 4 across the top of            While the concrete is still wet, scatter mixed gravel on
the frame. If necessary, add concrete to low areas and screed        the surface. Sand-and-gravel suppliers and garden centers sell
again until the surface is smooth and free of low spots.             colorful gravel designed for seeding. For best results, select a
                                                                     mixture with stones no larger than W' in diameter.

Press the seeded gravel into the surface of the concrete             Pour concrete into the remaining steps, screeding and
using a concrete float, until the tops of the stone are flush with   seeding each step before moving on to the next. For a neater
the surface of the concrete. Remove any concrete that spills         appearance, use an edging tool (inset) to smooth the cracks
over the edges of the frame using a trowel.                          between the timbers and the concrete as each step is finished.

184 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

When the sheen disappears from the poured concrete After concrete has dried overnight. apply a fine mist of (4 to 6 hours after pouring), use a float to smooth out any high water to the surface, then scrub it with a stiff brush to expose or low spots in each step. Be careful not to force seeded gravel the seeded gravel. too far into the concrete. Let the concrete dry overnight.

Variation: To create a nonslip surface on smooth concrete Remove the plastic from the timbers, and cover the without seeding, draw a stiff-bristled brush or broom once concrete with burlap. Allow the concrete to cure for several across the concrete while it is still wet. days, spraying it occasionally with water to ensure even curing. Note: Concrete residue can be cleaned from timbers using a solution of 5% muriatic acid and water.

                                                                                                             Walkways (7 Steps •   185

Stone steps blend natural elegance and beauty for a stunning landscape feature in any yard. Depending on how
stylized the design is and the type of stone (natural shaped or cut square), the steps can enhance either a formal or casual
outdoor living area.

186 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Flagstone Garden Steps F lagstone steps are perfect structures for managing natural slopes. Our design consists terraced patios. The goal, once you have the stock in hand, is to create a tread surface with as few stones of broad flagstone treads and blocky ashlar risers, as possible. This generally means you’ll be doing commonly sold as wall stone. The risers are prepared quite a bit of cutting to get the irregular shapes to fit with compactable gravel beds on which the flagstone together. For a more formal look, cut the flagstones treads rest. For the project featured here, we along straight lines so they fit together with small, purchased both the flagstone and the wall stone regular gaps. in their natural split state (as opposed to sawn). It may seem like overkill, but you should plan on purchasing 40 percent more flagstone, by square Tools & Materials ~ foot coverage, than your plans say you need. The process of fitting the stones together involves a lot Tape measure Wall stone of cutting and waste. Mason’s string Flagstone The average height of your risers is defined by Marking paint Stone chisels the height of the wall stone available to you . These Line level Stone and block rough stones are separated and sold in a range of Torpedo level adhesive thicknesses (such as 3 to 4”), but hand-picking 4-ft. level Rubber mallet the stones helps bring them into a tighter range. Excavation tools Eye and ear The more uniform the thicknesses of your blocks, Maul protection the less shimming and adjusting you’ll have to do. Hand tamp Work gloves (Remember, all of the steps must be the same size, Wood stakes Small brush to prevent a tripping hazard.) You will also need Lumber (2 x 4, Banker box (see to stock up on slivers of rocks to use as shims to 4x 4) page 82) bring your risers and returns to a consistent height; Straight 2 x 4 Spade breaking and cutting your stone generally produces Landscape fabric Granite or polymeric plenty of these. Compactable gravel sand Flagstone steps work best when you create the Coarse sand broadest possible treads: think of them as a series of

I Construction Details

           Riser stoIles'--_ _ _

,. I •

                                                           Comph     ble gravel

                                                                                                Walkways (7 Steps •   187

     Step Variations ~

     Pave the slope. Sometimes the best solution for garden        These terraces are made from large flagstone steppers
     steps is simply to lay some broad, flat rocks down on a       supported by stacked riser stones. They function as steps
     pathway more or less as you find it. Make some effort to      in managing the slope, but they look and feel more like
     ensure that the surface of each rock is relatively flat and   a split-level patio. For a natural look and the best visual
     safe to walk on . Do not use this approach on steep slopes    effect, terrace-type steps should mimic the topography of
     (greater than 2 in 12) or in heavily traveled areas.          your yard .

                                                                                    -
     Cut-limestone blocks that are roughly uniform in size         Stacked slabs cannot be beat for pure simplicity, longevity,
     are laid in a step formation to create a stately passageway   and ease of maintenance. The initial cost is high, and stacking
     up this small hill. A hand-formed mortar cap adorns           stones that weigh several hundred pounds (or more) does
     the sides of the outdoor stairway for a more finished         require professionals with heavy equipment. But once these
     appearance.                                                   lovely garden steps are in place they'll stay put for generations
                                                                   with hardly any attention beyond a simple hosing off.

188 • C OMPLET E GU lD E TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I How to Build Flagstone Garden steps

Measure the height and length of the slope to calculate Begin the excavation: for the area under the first riser and the rise and run dimensions for each step (see page 143 for return stones, dig a trench to accommodate a 4”-layer of help with designing and laying out steps). Plot the footprint of gravel, plus the thickness of an average flagstone tread. For the your steps on the ground using marking paint. Purchase wall area under the back edge of the first step’s tread and the riser stones for your risers and returns in a height equal to the rise and return stones of the second step, dig to accommodate of your steps. Also buy flagstone (with approx. 40% overage) a 4”-layer of gravel, plus a 1”-layer of sand. Compact the soil for the step treads. with a 2 x 4 or 4 x 4.

Add a layer of compactable gravel to within 1” of the Set the riser stones and one or two return stones onto the planned height and tamp. Add a top layer of compactable gravel base. Level the riser stones side to side by adding or gravel and level it side to side and back to front. This top layer removing gravel as needed. Level the risers front to back with should be a flagstone’s thickness below grade. This will keep a torpedo level. Allow for a slight up-slope for the returns (the the rise of the first step the same as the following steps. Leave steps should slope slightly downward from back to front so the second layer of gravel uncompacted for easy adjustment the treads will drain). Seat the stones firmly in the gravel with a of the riser and return stones. hand maul, protecting the stone with a wood block. (continued)

                                                                                                                 Walkways (7 Steps •    189

Line the excavated area for the first tread with landscape           Set the second group of risers and returns: first, measure
fabric, draping it to cover the insides of the risers and returns.   the step/run distance back from the face of your first risers
Add layers of compactable gravel and tamp down to within 1"          and set up a level mason's string across the sand bed. Position
of the tops of the risers and returns. Fill the remainder of the     the second-step risers and returns as you did for the first step,
bed with sand and level it side to side with a 2 x 4. Slope it       except these don't need to be dug in on the bottom because
slightly from back to front. This layer of sand should be a little   the bottom tread will reduce the risers' effective height.
above the first risers and returns so that the tread stones will
compact down to sit on the wall stones.

Fold the fabric over the tops of the risers and trim off the         Fill in with smaller stones near the back. Cut and dress
excess. Set the flagstone treads of the first step like a puzzle,    stones where necessary using stone chisels and a maul or
leaving a consistent distance between stones. Use large, heavy       mason's hammer (see pages 82 to 83 for tips on cutting stone).
stones with relatively straight edges at the front of the step,      Finding a good arrangement takes some trial and error. Strive
overhanging the risers by about 2".                                  for fairly regular gaps, and avoid using small stones as they are
                                                                     easily displaced. Ideally, all stones should be at least as large
                                                                     as a dinner plate.

190 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Adjust the stones so the treads form a flat surface. Use a Shim between treads and risers with thin shards of stone. leve l as a guide, and add wet sand under thinner stones or (Do not use sand to shim here). Glue the shards in place with remove sand from beneath thicker stones until all the flags block and stone adhesive. Check each step to make sure there come close to touching the level and are stable. is no path for sand to wash out from beneath the treads. You can settle smaller stones in sand with a mallet, but cushion your blows with a piece of wood.

complete the second step in the same manner as the first. Fill the joints between stones with sand by sweeping the The bottoms of the risers should be at the same height as sand across the treads. Use coarse, dark sand such as granite the bottoms of the tread on the step below. Continue building sand, or choose polymeric sand, which resists washout better steps to the top of the slope. Note: The top step often will not than regular builder’s sand. Inspect the steps regularly for the require returns. first few weeks and make adjustments to the heights of stones as needed.

                                                                                                            Walkways (7 Steps •   191

I Boardwalk W hether as a garden path or a high-traffic walkway, a boardwalk can add a touch of elegance to any yard. The simplicity of this project’s design makes it an easy solution to many walkway problems. Frames measuring 29 x 45” are constructed from pressure-treated lumber and recessed in trenches along the project area. Cedar decking boards conceal the frame, creating a lovely walkway surface through your yard. The boardwalk should be built on a relatively flat stretch of ground. For greater stability, fasten the frames together with Yl6 x 2 Y2” galvanized lag screws driven through both sides of the end boards.

    Tools & Materials ~
    Mason's string            2 x 4 pressure-
    Excavation tools              treated lumber
    Hand tamp                 Galvanized deck
    Circular saw                  screws (2 Y2, 3")
    Drill                     Yl 6 X 2 Y/ galvanized
    Ratchet wrench                lag screws with
    T-bevel                      washers
    Wood stakes               % x 6 cedar decking
    Professional-grade           boards
      landscape fabric        /'4" plywood spacer           A boardwalk is great for creating a leve l, elevated path over
                                                            uneven ground or low-lying areas that tend to get washed
    Compactable gravel
                                                            out or swampy during wet weather. To increase the height of
                                                            a boardwalk, use wide lumber (2 x 6,2 x 8, or larger) for the
                                                            frame construction.

I How to Build a Boardwalk
                                                                                layout the edges of the walk using
                                                                                stakes and string. Dig a trench 4V/ deep
                                                                                x 34" wide, running the full length of the
                                                                                site. Cover the trench base with landscape
                                                                                fabric, overlapping strips by at least 6".
                                                                                Add a 2"-layer of compactab le gravel, rake
                                                                                it flat and smooth, and compact it even ly
                                                                                with a hand tamp.

192 • COMPLETE GUIDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

construct each boardwalk frame with three 2 x 4 stringer Install the frames. Lay the frames into the trench, butting pieces cut at 42” and two end pieces cut at 29”. Assemble the them end to end with their side edges aligned. Fasten the frame as shown here, using pairs of 3” deck screws driven frames together with pairs of lag screws driven through pilot through the end boards and into the stringers (drill pilot holes holes on both sides of the mating end boards. Backfill along for the screws). For shorter frames at the end of a run, cut the the side edges of the frames with gravel for drainage. stringers 3” shorter than the total length needed.

1 Yz"
overhang

           \         ~-\ -------------'!',
        ,~
     .,,-                       \                                             I
                                                                                                ....
                                                                                                       ....... '
,-                                  \                2 x 4                I                                        '....,
                                                                                                                   If
                                        \        corner      I
                                            __ JrEme__
     \\                                     - - - - - - - -,
      \\                                                                                                    II
          \\
           \\
            \\
               \\
                 ,
                    \\
                     \\
                      \\                                                             II


\ II I \ If I
… … I — — , \ — --- — … … I

Variation: To create a corner, position two frame sections at the angle in the trench with the front corners touching. Tack a string between the back corners, then measure and cut pressure-treated 2 x 4s to size for one corner stringer Deck the frame. Cut the decking boards at 32” . Starting and two nailers. Use a T-bevel to find the angles created by at one end of the walk, position each board so it overhangs the turn, and miter-cut the ends of each board to the angle the frames by 1112” on both sides. Drill pilot holes and fasten of the turn. Fasten the pieces together with 3” deck screws. the board to the frame with pairs of 2V/ deck screws For the decking, use the same angle to miter-cut across the driven into each stringer. Install the remaining deck boards face of the boards. Cut them to size as you go. using a plywood spacer to gap the boards W’ apart.

                                                                                                                                                                                Walkways (7 Steps •   193

Patio Rooms & Amenities F eaturing several projects for turning an ordinary open patio into a custom outdoor room, this chapter is all about making the most of your patio space. A patio room is more of a design concept than a specific type of structure. The idea is to enhance a space with just the right elements to make it more usable, comfortable, or private. If your patio feels just a little too exposed or if the layout could use some definition and a sense of enclosure, an overhead or side screening could be just what’s needed to complete your outdoor oasis. If you like the protection of a covered patio but don’t want a solid roof overhead, then a patio enclosure may be the perfect alternative. Or, for a truly classic patio overhead, you can’t beat the look and subtle shading of a cedar arbor. You’ll even find a project for transforming the undesirable space under a second- story deck into a pleasant covered patio. As for amenities, we’ve included two of the most popular back yard projects: an outdoor kitchen for the patio and landscape lighting, that can be used on a patio or walkway. If you’re building a new patio and want to include either of these amenities, be sure to plan for the utility hookups early in the process, in case you need to run lines under the patio surface.

In this chapter: • Under-Deck Patio • Patio Enclosure • Patio Arbor & Trellis • Screened Patio Room • Outdoor Kitchen • Low-voltage Patio & Landscape Lighting

                                                       • 195

l Under-Deck Patio

S    econd-story walk-out decks can be a mixed
     blessing. On top, you have an open, sun-filled
perch with a commanding view of the landscape. The
                                                                The system works by capturing water that falls
                                                           through the decking above and channeling it to the
                                                           outside edge of the deck. Depending on your plans,
space below the deck, however, is all too often a dark     you can let the water fall from the ceiling panels along
and chilly nook unprotected from water runoff. As a        the deck's edge, or you can install a standard rain
result, an under-deck area often ends up as wasted         gutter and downspout to direct the water to a single
space or becomes a holding area for seasonal storage       exit point on the ground (see pages 203 to 205).
items or the less desirable outdoor furniture.
     But there's an easy way to reclaim all that
convenient outdoor space-by installing a
weatherizing ceiling system that captures runoff
                                                               Tools & Materials ~
water from the deck above, leaving the area below dry          4-ft. level                 I" stainless
enough to convert into a versatile outdoor room. You           Chalk line                     steel screws
can even enclose the space to create a screened-in             Drill                       Rain gutter system
patio room.                                                    Aviation snips                 (optional)
     The under-deck system featured in this project is         Hacksaw                     Ear and eye
designed for do-it-yourself installation. Its components           (for optional              protection
are made to fit almost any standard deck and come                  rain gutter)            Work gloves
in three sizes to accommodate different deck-joist             Under-deck                  Tape measure
spacing (for 12", 16", and 24" on-center spacing).                 ceiling system          Carpenter's pencil
Once the system is in place, the under-deck area               \t\1aterproof               Color-matched
is effectively "dried in", and you can begin adding                acrylic caulk              caulk
amenities like overhead lighting, ceiling fans, and                (and caulk gun)
speakers to complete the outdoor room environment.

                                                                             Made of weather-resistant vinyl, this
                                                                             under-deck system creates an attractive,
                                                                             maintenance-free ceiling-the perfect
                                                                             shelter for an open-air or enclosed patio
                                                                             space below.

196 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Design Tips

   A

                                      c

This under-deck system (see Resources, page 250) consists For a finished look, paint the decking lumber that will be of four main parts: the joist rails mount to the deck joists exposed after the system is installed. Typically, the lower and help secure the other components. The collector panels portion of the ledger board (attached to the house) and the (A) span the joist cavity to capture water falling through the outer rim joist (at the outer edge of the deck) remain exposed. deck above. Water flows to the sides of the panels where it falls through gaps in the joist rails (8) and into the joist gutters (e) (for interior joists) and boundary gutters (for outer joists). The gutters carry the water to the outside edge of the deck.

Consider surrounding architectural elements when you select a system for sealing off the area below your deck. Here, the under-deck system is integrated with the deck and deck stairs both visually and functionally.

                                                                                                          Patio Room s (7 Amenities •   197

I How to Install an Under-deck System

Check the undersides of several deck joists to make                   If your deck is not level, you must compensate for this
sure the structure is level. This is important for establishing the   when setting the ceiling slope. To determine the amount of
proper slope for effective water flow.                                correction that's needed, hold one end of the leve l against a
                                                                      joist and tilt the leve l until it reads perfectly leve l. Measure the
                                                                      distance from the joist to the free end of the level . Then, divide
                                                                      this measurement by the length of the level. For example, if the
                                                                      distance is 114" and the level is 4 ft. long, the deck is out of level
                                                                      by V16" per foot.

To establish the slope for the ceiling system, mark the               Create each slope reference line using a chalk line.
ends of the joists closest to the house. Measure up from the          Hold one end of the chalk line at the mark made in Step 3,
bottom 1" for every 10 ft. of joist length (or approximately          and hold the other end at the bottom edge of the joist where
Va" per ft.) and make a mark. Add or subtract the out-of-Ievel        it meets the rim joist at the outside edge of the deck. Snap a
factor from step 2.                                                   reference line on all of the joists.

198 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Install vinyl flashing along the ledger board in the joist Begin installing the joist rails, starting 1” away from the cavities. Attach the flashing with 1” stainless steel screws. ledger. Position each rail with its bottom edge on the chalk Caulk along the top edges of the flashing where it meets the line, and fasten it to the joist at both ends with 1” stainless ledger and both joists using quality, waterproof acrylic caulk. steel screws; then add one or two screws in between. Avoid Also caulk the underside of the flashing for an extra layer over-driving the screws and deforming the rail. Leaving a little of protection. room for movement is best.

                                                                 8

Install the remaining rails on each joist face, leaving a Measure the full length of each joist cavity, and cut a 1V/ (minimum) to 2” (maximum) gap between rails. Install rails collector panel %” shorter than the cavity. This allows room along both sides of each interior joist and along the insides for expansion of the panels. For narrower joist cavities, of each outside joist. Trim the final rail in each row as needed trim the panel to width following the manufacturer’s using aviation snips. sizing recommendations.

                                                                                                                      (continued)

                                                                                                       Patio Rooms (7 Amenities •   199

                                                                                              Trim panel here

Scribe and trim the collector panels for a tight fit against            Trim the corners of the collector panels as needed to
the ledger board. Hold a carpenter's pencil flat against the            accommodate joist hangers and other hardware. This may
ledger, and move the pen cil along the board to transfer its            be necessary only at the house side of the joist cavity; at the
contours to the panel. Trim the panel along the scribed line.           outer end, the V/ expansion gap should clear any hardware.

    11

Install the collector panels. starting at the house. With the           Prepare each joist gutter by cutting it %" shorter than the
textured side of the panel facing down, insert one side edge            joist it will attach to (if the joists rest on a structural beam, see
into the joist rails, and then push up gently on the opposite           page 202). On the house end of each gutter, trim the corners of
side until it fits into the opposing rails. When fully installed, the   the flanges at 45°. This helps the gutter fit tightly to the ledger.
panels should be tight against the ledger and have a V/ gap at
the rim joist.

200 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

13

                                                                                                               Caulk here
                            -

Cut four or five Vs” tabs into the bottom surface at the Attach self-adhesive foam weatherstrip (available from outside ends of the gutters. This helps promote the drainage of the manufacturer) at the home-end of each joist gutter. Run a water over the edge of the gutter. bead of caulk along the foam strip to water-seal it to the gutter. The weather strip serves as a water dam .

15 16

Install each joist gutter by spreading its sides open slightly Prepare the boundary gutters following the same steps while pushing the gutter up onto the joist rails until it snaps used for the joist gutters. Install each boundary gutter by into place. The gutter should fit snugly against the collector slipping its long, outside flange behind the joist rails and panels. The gutter’s home-end should be tight against the pushing up until the gutter snaps into place. Install the ledger with the V/ expansion gap at the rim joist. boundary gutters working from the house side to the outer edge of the deck.

                                                                                                                      (continued)

                                                                                                      Patio Room s (7 A menities •   201

Run a bead of color-matched caulk along the joint                      If collector panels are misshapen because the joist
where the collector panels meet the ledger board. This is              spacing is too tight, free the panel within the problem area,
for decorative purposes only and is not required to prevent            then trim about Vs" from the side edge of the panel. Reset the
water intrusion.                                                       panel in the rails. If necessary, trim the panel edge again in
                                                                       slight increments until the panel fits properly.

     Working Around Beams ~

                                   Decking

                     Rim joist

                                                                       Collector panel

         Deck beam                                                            Joist gutter

                          Post

                                                         Rain gutter

     For decks that have joists resting on top of a structural beam, stop the joist gutters and boundary gutters 1112"
     short of the beam. Install a standard rain gutter along the house-side of the beam to catch the water as it exits the
     system gutters. (On the opposite side of the beam, begin new runs of joist gutters that are tight against the beam and
     stop %" short of the rim joist. The joist rails and collector panels should clear the beam and can be installed as usual.)
     Or, you can simply leave the overhang area alone if you do not need water runoff protection below it.

202 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Runoff Gutters A basic gutter system for a square or rectangular without seams. Otherwise, you can join sections of deck includes a straight run of gutter channel with a channel with special connectors. Shop around for the downspout at one end. Prefabricated vinyl or aluminum best type of hanger for your situation. If there’s limited gutter parts are ideal for this application. Gutter backing to support the back side of the channel or to channels are commonly available in lO-ft. and 20-ft. fasten into, you may have to use strap-type hangers that lengths, so you might be able to use a single channel can be secured to framing above the gutter.

Runoff gutters are installed at the ends of the under-deck channels to capture runoff water and redirect it away from the enclosed area through downspouts.

I How to Install an Under-deck Runoff Gutter Snap a chalk line onto the beam or 1 other supporting surface to establish the slope of the main gutter run. The line will correspond to the top edge of the gutter channel. The ideal slope is V,6” per foot. For example, with a 16-ft.-long gutter, the beginning is 1” higher than the end. The downspout should be located just inside the low end of the gutter channel. Mark the beam at both ends to create the desired slope, then snap a chalk line between the marks. The high end of the gutter should be just below the boundary gutter in the ceiling system.

                                                                                                                      (continued)

                                                                                                       Patio Rooms (7 Amenities •   203

    2                                                                  3

Install a downspout outlet near the end of the gutter run            Install hanger clips (depending on the type of hangers or
so the top of the gutter is flush with the slope line. If you plan   support clips you use, it is often best to install them before
to enclose the area under the deck, choose an inconspicuous          installing the gutter channel). Attach a hanger every 24" so
location for the downspout, away from traffic areas.                 the top of the gutter will hang flush with the slope line.

     Tip ~                                                             4

     Gutters come in several material types,
     including PVC, enameled steel and copper. In most
     cases you should try to match the surrounding trim              Cut sections of gutter channel to size using a hacksaw.
     materials, but using a more decorative material for             Attach an end cap to the beginning of the main run, then fit
     contrast can be effective.                                      the channel into the downspout outlet (allowing for expansion,
                                                                     if necessary) and secure the gutter in place.

204 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

5 6

                                                                                                                     Hanger

Join sections of channel together, if necessary, for long Cut the downspout piping to length and fasten an runs using connectors. Install a short section of channel with an elbow fitting to its bottom end. Attach the downspout to the end cap on the opposite side of the downspout outlet. Paint the downspout outlet, then secure the downspout to a post or area whe re the downspout will be installed if it is unpainted. other vertical support using hangers (inset).

                                                                    Routing Drainpipes ~

                                                                    You may have to get a little creative when

Cut a drainpipe to run from the downspout elbow to a routing the downspout drain in an enclosed porch or convenient drainage point. Position the pipe so it directs water patio. Shown here, two elbows allow for a 90° turn of away from the house and any traffic areas. Attach the pipe to the drainpipe. the downspout elbow. Add a splash block, if desired.

                                                                                                       Patio Rooms (7 Amenities •   205

IPatio Enclosure

I f you like the openness and plentiful light of a patio
  but want more protection from rain and strong
winds, this stylish, contemporary patio shelter may
be just what you're looking for. Designed as a cross
between an open-air arbor or pergola and an enclosed
three-season porch, this patio structure has clear
glazing panels on its roof and sides, allowing plenty
of sunlight through while buffering the elements and
even blocking harmful UV rays.
     The roof of the patio shelter is framed with closely
spaced 2 x 4 rafters to create the same light-filtering
effects of a slatted arbor roof. The rafters are supported
by a doubled-up 2 x 10 beam and 4 x 6 timber posts.
Because the shelter is attached to the house, the posts
are set on top of concrete foundation piers, or footings,
that extend below the frost line. This prevents any
shifting of the structure in areas where the ground
freezes in winter.
     The patio shelter's side panels cut down on wind
while providing a degree of privacy screening. Their
simple construction means you can easily alter the
dimensions or locations of the panels to suit your own
plans. In the project shown, each side has two glazing
panels with a 3Yz" space in between, for airflow. If desired,
you can use a single sheet of glazing across the entire side
section. The glazing is held in place with wood strips and
screws so they can be removed for seasonal cleaning.

Slats of white oak sandwich clear polycarbonate panels
to create wa lls that block the wind without blocking light
and views.

206 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Building against a solid wall and not in front of a patio door makes the space inside this contemporary shelter much more usable. The corrugated roof panels (see Resources, page 250) made of clear polycarbonate allow light to enter while keeping the elements out.

                                                                                                    Patio Rooms (7 Amenities •   207

I Patio Enclosure Plans House

     Closure strip

                            C
                                E

    Glazing panels
    behind slats

                                                                         Patio door
                                                                         (beyond)
                            B

     ---------- -----
                                                 M

                                                                                       -<.")"--Patio slab
                                                                        r ':::>>G:->'''''''J>,

                                                                      _.j---       - { oncrete footing

     Plan your own patio shelter based on the requirements set by the local building code. Your city's building department
     or a qualified building professional can help you with the critical structural specifications, such as the size and depth of
     the concrete post footings, the sizing of beam members, and the overall roof construction. The building department will
     help make sure your shelter is suitable for the local weather conditions (particularly wind and snow loads).

     Cutting List
      Key Part                  No. Size               Material                      Key Part                     No. Size                Material
       A   Post       2 31/1 X 51/1 x 144" 4 x 6 treated pine                          H         Slat cleat cap    4 % X1 1/1 X 60"       1 x 2 pine
                                                                                      --
       B Beam member 2 11/1 x 91/4 x 120"* 2 x 10 treated pine                          I        Beam blocks       3 31/1 x 31/1 X 8"     4 x 4 pine
       C Rafter      16 1V1 x 31/1 x 120"* 2 x 4 pine                                   J        Purlin           14 11/1 x 11/1 x 120" 2 x 2 pine
      ----              -       ---               ----
       D   Ledger                   1V1 x 5V1 x 144"   2 x 6 treated pine              K         Roof panel        6 V4 x 26 x 96"        Corrugated polycarbonate
       E   Back post             2 1V1 X 1V1 X 96"*    2 x 2 pine                      L         Side panel        4 V4 x 36 x 58"        Clear polycarbonote
       F   Slat cleat            4 1V1 X 1V1 X 60"     2 x 2 pine                     M Slat                      18 % x 31/1 X 80"*      White oak
      ----                                        ----                                ----                        --               ----
       G   Bock post cop         2 % x 1V1 X 96"*        x   2 pine                   N Post bose                  2 11/1 x 31/1 X 3Vz"
     *Size listed is prior to final trimming

208 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Tools & Materials Lumber Chalk line Corrosion-resistant 16d and 8d common nails 4-ft. level Y2”-dia. corrosion-resistant lag bolts and washers Plumb bob Exterior wood glue or construction adhesive Mason’s string Corrosion-resistant framing anchors (for rafters) Digging tools Deck screws (l 12, 3” ) Concrete mixing tools Polycarbonate roofing panels Circular saw Clear polycarbonate panels Ratchet wrench Closure strips Line level Roofing screws with EPDM washers Reciprocating saw or handsaw Roofing adhesive/sealant Drill with bits Wood finishing materials Finish application tools Neoprene weatherstripping Gravel Scrap lumber 12” -dia . concrete tube forms Exterior wood stain Concrete mix Stakes %,‘-dia. J-bolts Eye and ear protection % x 4” corrosion resistant lag screws Hammer Flashing Caulk gun Silicone caulk Table saw, router, or circular saw Corrosion-resistant metal post bases and hardware Work gloves

                               Polycarbonate panels
                                                                                                  Closure strips

                                                                                       Roofing screws with
                                                                                       EPDM washers

                                                                         Flashing

                                                                           \
                                                     Sealant

                                       ~ Corrugated
                                              polycarbonate panels

The roofing and side glazing panels of the patio shelter are made with tough polycarbonate materials. The corrugated roofing panels allow up to 90% light transmission while blocking virtually 100 percent of harmful UV rays. The flat side panels offer the transparency of glass but are lighter and much stronger than glass. Also shown is: wall flashing designed to be tucked under siding; closure strips that fit between the 2 x 2 purlins and the corrugated roof panels; self- sealing screws and polycarbonate caulk.

                                                                                                   Patio Rooms (7 Amenities •   209

I How to Build a Patio Enclosure

Mark the layout for the ledger board on the house wall. Layout the post footing locations in the patio area. To mark the
cutout for the ledger board, include the width of the ledger board, plus the height of the roofing, plus 1112" for the flashing. The length
of the cutout should be 1" longer than the length of the ledger board (12 ft. as shown). Plumb down from the ends of the ledger,
then measure in to mark the locations of the post centers. At each of these points, run a perpendicular string line from the house
out to about 2 ft. beyond the post locations. Set up a third string line, perpendicular to the first two, to mark the cente rs of the posts.
Plumb down from the string line intersections and mark the post centers on the ground with stakes.

             ---===---~-------=~---------,
                            - - --
        1-- - - - - - - - -                                                3

Dig a hole for a concrete tube form at each post location               Fill the tube forms with concrete and screed it leve l with
following the local building code for the footing depth. Add 6"         the tops of the forms. At each post-center location, embed a
of gravel and tamp it down. Position the tube forms so they are         J-bolt into the wet concrete so it extends the recommended
plumb and extend at least 2" above the ground. Backfill around          distance above the top of the form . Let the concrete cure.
them with soil and compact thoroughly.

210 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

                   --       ~­

                                      --         - -       --
                 '. ~--
                          -~--
                                               - - - - -- - - -                -
                 L - - - --------'-                 - - ---

Cut out the house siding for the ledger board using a circular saw. Cut only through the siding, leaving the wall sheathing. Note: If the sheathing is fiberboard instead of plywood, you may have to remove the fiberboard; consult your local building department. Replace any damaged building paper covering the sheathing.

Stain the wood parts before you begin installing the shelter Apply a protective finish to the wood slats as desired. closure strips and panels. We used a black, semitransparent We used a semitransparent deck stain. deck and siding stain.

                                                                                                                      (continued)

                                                                                                       Patio Room s (7 Amenities •   211

Install the ledger. First, slip corrugated roof flashing or metal   Anchor the post bases to the concrete footing. securing
roof flashing behind the siding above the ledger cutout so          them with the base manufacturer's recommended hardware.
the ve rtical flange extends at least 3" above the bottom of the    Make sure the bases are aligned with each other and are
siding. Cut the ledger board to length. Fasten the ledger to        perpendicular to the house wall.
the wall using % x 4" lag screws driven through counterbored
pilot holes at each wall-stud location. Seal over the screw
heads and counterbores with silicone caulk.

Cut off the bottom ends of the posts so they are perfectly square. Set each post in its base and hold it plumb. Fasten the
post to the base using the manufacturer's recommended fasteners. Brace the posts with temporary bracing. Note: You will cut the
posts to length in a later step.

212 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

10

Cut a pattern rafter from 2 x 4 lumber using the desired Cut the inner beam member to length from 2 x 10 lumber, roof slope to find the angle cut for the top end. Angle the then bevel the top edge to follow the roof slope. Position the bottom end as desired for decorative effect. Set the rafter in board so its top edge is on the post markings, and it overhangs position so its top end is even with the top of the ledger and the posts equally at both ends (12” of overhang is shown). Tack its bottom end passes along the side of a post. Mark along the the board in place with 16d nails. bottom edge of the rafter onto the post. Repeat to mark the other post. Use a string and line level to make sure the post marks are leve l with each other.

12 1----

Cut the outer beam memberto length from 2 x 10 lumber. Anchor the beam members together and to the posts Bevel the top edge following the roof slope, and remove with pairs of W’-dia. lag bolts and washers. Cut the posts off enough material so that the bottom edges of the two beam flush with the tops of the beam members using a handsaw or members will be leve l with each other. Tack the member in reciprocating saw. place with nails.

                                                                                                                   (continued)

                                                                                                     Patio Rooms (7 Amenities •   213

               -
                                                                          15
                        r
           r                                     C
                                     r
                                                             <>

Trim the cutoff post pieces to length and use them as                  Mark the rafter layout onto the ledger and beam. As
blocking between the beam members. Position the blocks                 shown here, the rafters are spaced 9V2" apart on center. The
evenly spaced between the posts and fasten them to both                two outer rafters should be flush with the ends of the ledger
beam members with glue and 16d nails. Note: Diagonal bracing           and beam.
between the posts and beam may be recommended or
required in some areas; consult your local building department.

      6--------------~----------------~

Install metal framing anchors onto the ledger for securing the top rafter ends using the anchor manufacturer's recommended
fasteners. Use the pattern rafter or a block to position the anchors so the rafters will be flush with the top of the ledger.

214 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

17 18

Use the pattern rafter to mark the remaining rafters and Install the 2 x 2 purlins perpendicular to the rafters then cut them. Install the rafters one at a time. Fasten the top using 3” deck screws. Position the first purlin a few inches ends to the metal anchor using the recommended fasteners. from the bottom ends of the rafters. Space the remaining Fasten the bottom ends to both beam members by toenailing purlins 24” on center. The ends of the purlins should be flush one 8d nail through each rafter side and into the beam member. with the outside faces of the outer rafters.

19 20

Add 2 x 2 blocking between the purlins along the outer Starting at one side of the roof, install the roof panel rafters, and fasten them with 3” deck screws. This blocking will closure strips over the purlins using the manufacturer’s support the vertical closure strips for the roof panels. recommended fasteners. Begin every run of strips from the same side of the roof, so the ridges in the strips will be aligned. (continued)

                                                                                                        Patio Rooms (7 Amenities •   215

Add vertical closure strips over the 2 x 2 purlin blocking to   Position the first roofing panel along one side edge of
fill in between the horizontal strips.                          the roof. The inside edge of the panel should fall over a rafter.
                                                                If necessary, trim the panel to length or width following the
                                                                man ufactu rer's recom mendations.

Drill pilot holes, and fasten the first panel to the closure    Apply a bead of the recommended adhesive/sealant
strips with the recommended type of screw and rubber            (usually supplied by the panel manufacturer) along the last
washer. Fasten the panel at the peak (top) of every other       trough of the roofing panel. Set the second panel into place,
corrugation. Drive the screws down carefully, stopping when     overlapping the last troughs on both panels. Fasten the second
the washer contacts the panel but is not compressed. This       panel. Install the remaining panels using the same procedure.
allows for thermal expansion of the panel.                      Caulk the seam between the roof panels and the roof flashing.

216 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

                                                                        Tip ~

                                               Blade

                                                                       If you do not have wall flashing designed to

To create channels for the side glazing panels, mill a work with the roof profile, place closure strips upside rabbet into each of the eight vertical 2 x 2 cleats. Consult down onto the roof panels and run another bead of the glazing manufacturer for the recommended channel size, adhesive/sealant over the tops of the strips. Work making sure to provide space for thermal expansion of the the flashing down and embed it into the sealant. panels. Mill the rabbets using a table saw, router, or circular saw. Seal along all exposed edges of the ledger with Stop the rabbets so the bottom edges of the panels will be even silicone caulk. with, or slightly above, the bottom edge of the lowest side slat.

Position a cleat on each post at the desired height, with Cut the side slats to length to fit between the posts and the the cleat centered from side to side on the post. The rabbeted house wall. Mark the slat layouts onto the outside faces of the corner should face inside the shelter. Fasten the cleats to cleats, and install the slats with 1W’ deck screws or exterior the posts with 3” deck screws. Fasten two more cleats to the trim-head screws. Space the slats 3W’ apart or as desired. house wall so they are aligned and level with the post cleats.

                                                                                                                          (continued)

                                                                                                          Patio Room s (7 A menities •   217

                                                                          Tip ~

                                                                          Used for decorative accent slats on this patio
                                                                          shelter, white oak is a traditional exterior wood that
                                                                          was employed for boatbuilding as well as outdoor
Fasten the middle cleats to the slats on each side, leaving               furnishings. Although it requires no finishing, we
about 3V2" of space between the cleats (or as desired). The               coated the white oak with a dark, penetrating wood
cleats should overhang the top and bottom slats by 1W' (or                stain to bring out the grain.
as desired).

Cut the cap strips for the glazing panels from 1 x 2 material (or rip down strips from the 1 x 4 slat material). Position each
cap over a cleat and drill evenly spaced pilot holes through the cap and into the cleat. Make sure the holes go into the solid
(non-rabbeted) portion of the cleat. Drill counterbores, too (left). Drive screws to attach the post caps (right).

218 • C OMPLET E GU lD E TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Trim the side glazing panels to size following the Option: Add a 2 x 4 decorative cap on the outside face of manufacturer’s directions. Apply neoprene or EPDM stripping each post. Center the cap side-to-side on the post and fasten or packing to the side edges of the panels. Fit each panel into it with 16d casing nails. its cleat frame, cover the glazing edges with the 1 x 2 caps, and secu re the caps with 1%” deck screws. Note: If the glazing comes with a protective film, remove the film during this step as appropriate and make sure the panel is oriented for full uv protection.

                                                                                                    Patio Room s (7 Amenities •   219

IPatio Arbor & Trellis

A    traditional framed arbor can have a transformative
     effect on a patio. Architecturally, an arbor frames
the patio space, providing a sense of shelter and a
                                                           one side of the structure. A patio arbor like this is
                                                           easiest to build if it's freestanding or not attached
                                                           directly to your house. Permanent structures
room-like feel without closing it off from the outdoors.   attached to a house are subject to stricter building
The overhead framework of an arbor can be used to          code requirements than freestanding projects. The
support climbing plants for additional shading in the      arbor shown here is built upon new concrete footings
summer months.                                             located just outside the edges of the patio. Because
     In the following projects, you'll see how to build    the arbor is freestanding, the footings did not need
a classic four-post arbor and then how to add an           to extend below the frost line (as they would for an
additional post and supplemental lattice panels to         attached structure).

     Tools & Materials ~
     Tape measure               Ladder                     Posthole digger              Clamps
     Mason's string             Shovel                     Handsaw                      4 x 8-ft. lattice panels
     Line level                 Mortar box                 Cedar framing lumber         Galvanized brads
     Torpedo level              Concrete                       (2 x 4, 4 x 4,2 x 8,     Fence brackets
     Carpenter's square         Post anchors                   2 x 6, 2 x 2)            4d galvanized nails
     Speed square               Y/-dia. carriage bolts     Straightedge                 2 x 2 lattice molding
     Drill with W bit and       Rafter ties                Eye and ear protection       Pencil
       bit extension            J-bolts with nuts          16d galvanized nails         Chalk line
     Circular saw                  and washers             % x 4" lag screws            Hammer
     Ratchet-socket set         Work gloves                21'2" deck screws            Fence brackets

                                                                             Arbor structures make a dramatic visual
                                                                             statement when constructed over an
                                                                             ordinary patio. They also help cut down on
                                                                             wind and sun and create a more pleasant
                                                                             outdoor environment.

220 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

A Simple Arbor for a Garden Patio ~ A freestanding arbor can go almost anywhere in a 6” from the ends of the tie beams, space the rafters landscape, making it a great addition to a remote garden 2 ft. apart, with the ends extending past each tie patio. You can design and locate the arbor to shelter only beam by 1 ft. Position a cross strip across the top of a portion of a patio, or it can cover the entire area . The the rafters, beginning 6” from the ends of the rafters. arbor design described here is simpler than the one on Center the strip so it extends past the outside rafters the following pages and is typical of freestanding arbors in by about 6” . Drill pilot holes through the cross strip and a garden or landscape. into the rafters. Attach the cross strip with galvanized The arbor shown here is relatively small. You can screws. Add the remaining cross strips, spacing them easily adapt the design to different sizes, but don’t space 1 ft. apart. Finish your arbor by applying wood the posts more than 8 ft. apart. If you want to build a sealer or protectant. larger arbor, add additional posts between the corner posts. Before you begin construction, check your local building code for footing depth requirements and setback restrictions. The basics of building a freestanding arbor are as follows. First, layout the location of the posts using stakes and string. Make sure the layout is square by measuring from corner to corner and adjusting the layout until these diagonal measurements are equal. Dig postholes at the corners to the required depth using a posthole digger and fill each hole with 6” of gravel. Next. position the posts in the holes. To brace them in a plumb position, tack support boards to the posts on adjoining faces. Adjust the posts as necessary until they’re plumb. Drive a stake into the ground, flush against the base of each 2 x 4. Drive deck screws through the stakes, into the 2 x 4s. Mix one bag of dry concrete to anchor each post. Immediately check to make sure the posts are plumb, and adjust as necessary until the concrete begins to harden. Let the concrete cure for at least 24 hours. Measure, mark, and cut all the lumber for the arbor. Cut a 3 x 3” notch off the bottom corner of each tie beam, a 2 x 2” notch off the bottom corner of each 2 x 4 rafter, and a 1 x 1” notch off the bottom corner of each cross strip. Position a tie beam against the outside edge of a pair of posts, 7 ft. above the ground. Position the beam to extend about 1 ft. past the post on each side. Level the beam, then clamp it into place with wood screw clamps. Drill pilot holes and attach the tie beam to the posts with 3” lag screws. Use a line level to mark the opposite pair of posts at the same height as the installed tie beam. Attach the remaining tie beam. Cut off the posts so they’re level with the tops of the tie beams. Next, attach the rafters to the tops of the tie This version of a freestanding post-and-slat arbor is beams using rafter ties and galvanized nails. Beginning a 5 x 5-ft. cedar structure with an extended overhead.

                                                                                                  Patio Room s (7 A menities •   221

I How to Build a Patio Arbor
                                                 2

Create footings for the arbor posts by        Allow the footings to harden for at least one day, then attach the post anchor
digging a hole at least twice the size of     hardware to the J-bolts. Cut and install the arbor posts-for most arbors, 4 x 4 posts
the post bottom and at least 12" deep.        are large enough. Cut posts longer than the planned height, and brace them with
Fill with conc rete, and set a J-bolt in      2 x 4 braces so they are plumb. Leave the braces in pla ce until the beams and
each concrete footing. We positioned          rafters are secured in position.
the J-bolts so the edges of the posts are
flush with the patio.

    3

Use a square to mark the cutting lines for the posts at the desired height. Mark the height of the arbor onto the posts at
one end, then use a line level to transfer the height mark onto the posts at the other end. With a square, mark cutting lines on all
four sides of each post. Trim the posts at the cutting lines using a handsaw. Have a helper steady the post from below while you
cut. Note: You may use a power saw, like a cordless circular saw, to cut off the post tops, but only if your ladder provides enough
elevation that you can work from above the cutting line.

222 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

4

Cut beam members from 2 x 8 stock. Because we used Turn beams on edge, and mark locations for the rafters. two beam members each at the front and back of the project, Rafters should be no more than 24” apart. Start by marking the we cut four beam members. To create a 6” overhang at each outermost rafters-our plan called for a rafter at the inside and side, cut the beam members 12” longer than the distance outside edge of each post. Don’t forget to include the beam between the outside edges of the posts. Mark all beam overhang in the layout. members with a carpenter’s square, then gang-cut them with a circular saw and a straightedge.

Fasten the beam members to the posts at the front and back of the arbor. Screw a guide strip securely to the top of each post, then position the beam members and hold them in place temporarily by driving a screw down through the guide strip and into the top of each beam member. When installing beam pairs, as shown here, use a pair of carriage bolts with washers and nuts at each beam/post joint. Attach a W’ bit with a bit extension to your drill, and drill holes for the carriage bolts through both the beam members and the post.

                                                                                                                         (continued)

                                                                                                         Patio Room s (7 A menities •   223

Pound W'-dia. carriage bolts through the holes. carriage            Measure and mark 2 x 6 rafters to fit on top of the
bolts should be V2 to 1" longer than the combined widths of the     beams, perpendicular to the house. For best appearance,
outer rafters and the beam . For this project, we used a 7"-long    rafters should overhang the beams by at least 6". Cut with a
bolt. Slip a washer and nut onto the end of the carriage bolt and   circular saw. For added visual appeal, mark an angled cut of
tighten with a ratchet. Remove the guide strip.                     about 30° at the end of one rafter, then cut off with a circular
                                                                    saw. Use the rafter as a template to transfer the angle to the
                                                                    other rafters.

                                                                                             Beam mark
  9

Install the rafters on top of the beams at the rafter layout        Mark the posts and beams for crossbraces. From the
marks. Position the rafters so the angled ends are at the front     inside corner of each post/beam joint, mark an eq ual distance
of the project, with the shorter side resting on the beam. Use      (about 18") on the beam and the post. For crossbraces that fit
metal rafter ties, mounted to the beams, and deck screws to         between rafters, measure from the post mark to the top of the
attach the rafters. Option: Because the metal rafter ties can be    rafter, following the line created between the post mark and
quite visible in the finished product, you may prefer to toenail    the beam mark. For crossbraces that fit flush with the post and
the rafters in place with 16d galvanized nails.                     the beam, measure from the post mark to the beam mark for
                                                                    the inside dimension of the crossbrace.

224 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Mark the inside dimensions for the crossbraces onto a Install the crossbraces. Tack the crossbraces in position, piece of lumber of the same type as the posts (here, 4 x 4). then attach them with % x 4” lag screws. If the crossbrace Use a square to draw 45° cutting lines away from each end is fitted between the rafters, drive the lag screws through point of the inside dimension. Cut along these lines with a the counterbored pilot holes in the rafter and into the cross- circular saw to make the crossbraces. brace at the top. Attach with lag screws at each joint. Drive lag screws through the counterbored pilot holes that are perpendicular to the post or rafter.

13

Install the arbor slats on top of the rafters. We used 2 x 2 cedar spaced at 4” interva ls. Include an overhang of at least 6”. Attach the arbor slats with 2W’ deck screws driven down through the slats and into the rafters.

                                                                                                        Patio Rooms (7 Amenities •   225

I Adding a Trellis to an Arbor
Add a lattice-panel trellis to an arbor structure for
a more decorative appearance. Using manufactured
lattice panels and lattice molding and hanging the
panels with metal fence-panel hangers makes the job
inexpensive and quick. Or, you can build your own
lattice and frame. Plant climbing garden varieties
and train them up the trellis to embellish the design.
Lattice panels also increase your patio's privacy,
create a windbreak, and add additional shade for
sunny areas.

                                                                     Most building centers carry cedar, pressure-treated, and
                                                                     vinyl lattice in 2 x 8-ft. and 4 x 8-ft. panels. Standard lattice
                                                                     panels are W' thick. For a customized look, build your own
                                                                     lattice panels from exterior-rated lumber.

I How to Add a Trellis to an Arbor
    1                                                                  2



If the planned trellis is wider than 4 ft., you will need            Measure the openings between the posts to determine
additional support posts. Install posts using the same materials     the sizes for the lattice panels. Generally, panels should be
and techniques used for the corner posts of the arbor (see           sized so they are installed below the crossbraces between
page 222). If possible, install the posts so the lattice panels on   posts. Leave a few inches of open space beneath the panels
either side of each post will be equal in size.                      at ground leve l. Mark the locations of the panel tops onto the
                                                                     posts using a level to make sure the tops are even.

226 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Subtract 1W’ from the frame opening dimensions. and Miter-cut 2 x 2 lattice molding to frame the lattice panels. cut the lattice panels to size. To cut lattice panels, sandwich The finished width of the panel should be %” narrower than each panel between two boards near the cutting line to the opening. Nail one vertical and one horizontal frame piece prevent the lattice from separating. Clamp the boards and the together with galvanized brads. Set the lattice panel into the panel together and cut with a circular saw. channels, and attach the other frame pieces. Secure the lattice panels into the molding by driving brads through the molding and into the lattice at 12” intervals.

Attach three fence brackets to the posts. evenly spaced, Set the panels in the brackets. and bend the hanger on each side of the opening using 4d galvanized nails. On the flanges back to their original positions. Drive 1” galvanized nails top two brackets, bend the bottom and top flanges flat against through the flanges of the fence hangers and into the frames the post. Bend all outside flanges flat, away from the post, to of the lattice panels. allow installation of the lattice panel.

                                                                                                       Patio Rooms (7 Amenities •   227

I Screened Patio Room A screenin g system is an ingeniously simple and effective way to enclose a covered patio-leaving you free to enjoy the outdoors at any time of day compatible with standard fiberglass and aluminum screen materials. With the system shown in this project, each piece of without the annoyance of insects and other pests. A screen is secured into the base channels using standard basic system includes three main components: a base vinyl or rubber spline and a spline roller. The screen goes channel that mounts directly to the patio-roof posts, up quickly and easily after a little practice, and it doesn’t railings, and other framing members (as applicable); have to be perfectly tight right away; when the cap the screening (and spline); and a trim cap that snaps in pieces are snapped on, they add tension to the screening, place over the base channel to cover the screen edges pulling it tight from all sides of the opening. This does and add a finished look to the installation. The base a good job of eliminating the unsightly sag that occurs cap pieces are made to go together, but the screen and all too quickly with standard stapled-up screening. spline may need to be purchased separately. Be sure Replacing screen sections also is much easier with a to follow the system manufacturer’s specifications for screen system: just remove the surrounding cap pieces, screen type and spline size. Screen systems are typically pull out the spline, and install a new piece of screen.

     Tools & Materials ~
     Pruning sheers or           Corrosion -resi stant      Power hand planer             Work gloves
        aviation snips             deck screws              Exterior construction         Carpenter's square
     Drill with bits                (l,3 Yz")                  adhesive (and caulk        Tape measure
     Spline roller               Screening                    gun)                        Wood shims
     Utility knife               Spline cord                Concrete anchors or           Hinges and fasteners
     Rubber mallet               2 x 4 lumber or               deck screws                Galvanized finish nails
     Screen system                  composite               Eye and ear protection        Screen door handles,
        components                  equivalent              Clamps                          latches, and closer
     Level                       Straightedge               Circular saw                    hardware

                                                                               Screen systems are quick, easy
                                                                               products for screening in covered patios,
                                                                               including under-deck spaces like the patio
                                                                               shown here.

228 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Cladding Posts ~ With their textures and grain, plain wood posts are right at home in many parts of many homes. But when you combine them with gleaming new white vinyl-based products, they can look a little rough. One way to make your patio-roof posts blend better when you’re installing under-deck or screening systems is to clad them and paint them to match. Traditionally, clear dimensional lumber is used for the cladding. But to get seamless results, this often means you need to cut complicated dado-rabbet joints that run all the way from top to bottom at each corner. Then, you need to sand thoroughly and apply several coats of paint. An easier option for making all of your screen system parts match is to clad posts with one-piece PVC -, post cladding (see Resources, page 250). The product shown here is designed to fit around a 6 x 6” post. On the interior surface it is kerfed but the exterior vinyl surface is solid. This way, it can be bent around corners crisply and seamlessly.

                                          Vinyl cladding can be wrapped around wood posts seamlessly.

                                                                          Spline-based screening systems are
                                                                          available at home centers and hardware
                                                                          stores and through many websites.
                                                                          Screen Tight, the system shown here
                                                                          (see Resources, page 250), is made
                                                                          with UV-resistant PVC and is available
                                                                          with trim colors of white, gray, beige,
                                                                          and brown. Parts of the system include:
                                                                          stretchable spline cord (A); spline roller (B);
                                                                          adhesive for bonding rigid vinyl (C); storm
                                                                          door handles (D); storm door hinges (E);
                                                                          1" corrosion-resistant screws (F); screw-
                                                                          eye door latch (G); deck screws (H);
                                                                          decorative cap screws (I); track cap (J);
                                                                   E      track base (K); composite 2 x 4 (L);
                                              ,
                                                                          fiberglass screening (M).

                                                     ;            F

                                                         G

                                                                                              Patio Rooms &- Amenities •    229

I How to Install a Screening System
                                                                                                                ----
                                                                                                                 --
                                                                                                           l;...-- - - -   - -
                                                                                                             -------

Begin installing the track backers that frame the openings         Secure sole plates to the patio or porch floor using
you will be screening. You may use pressure-treated 2 x 4s         construction adhesive and appropriate fasteners (use concrete
or 2 x 2s. For a long-lasting and low-maintenance framework,       anchors for concrete, stone, or paver patios and use deck
we used composite 2 x 4-sized backers that came with the           screws for wood and nonwood decking).
screen system materials. These products are quite new and
are not rated for structural use. Attach the backers to the
inside faces of the posts, centered, using exterior construction
adhesive and 3%" deck screws.

    3

Attach cap plates to the beam or joist at the top of               Install the vertical track backer members with the top
the installation area, leaving 1%" between plates to create        ends fitted in the gaps you left in the cap plate. Make sure
recesses for the vertical backers.                                 the vertical members are plumb and then drive deck screws
                                                                   toenail style through the members and into the sole plate. Also
                                                                   drive screws up at angles through the vertical members and
                                                                   into the beam or joist at the top of the area. Drill pilot holes.

230 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

5

Install the door header and the horizontal track backers Cut a base channel to length for each vertical member using adhesive and deck screws. Locate the horizontal in the screen frame. At the tops of the posts, hold the base members 36 to 42” above the ground. channel back to allow room for the horizontal channels, if applicable (see step 12 photo). This results in less cutting of the cap trim later. Cut the channels using pruning shears or aviation snips.

Fasten the vertical channel pieces to the framing with 1” Cut the horizontal base channels to length and install corrosion-resistant screws. Drive a screw into each predrilled them with screws. The butted joints where the horizontal hole in the channel, then add a screw 2” from each end. Drive channels meet the verticals don’t have to be precise each screw in snugly but not so far that it warps the channel . or tight-fitting.

                                                                                                                      (continued)

                                                                                                       Patio Room s (7 Amenities •   231

Begin installing the screen by positioning a full piece of            Embed the spline at the starting point, where it should
screening over an opening so it overlaps several inches on all        fit fully into the groove of the base channel . Use a spline roller.
sides. Secure the screen into the horizontal base channel at one      Then, using one hand to pull the screen taut, press the spline
of the top corners using spline cord. You can plan to run the         into place to secure the screen along the top of the opening.
spline around the corners or cut it off at the ends as needed.

Secure the screen along both sides,           Trim off the excess screening with a            Install the trim caps over the base
then along the bottom using the same          sharp utility knife. Fiberglass screen cuts     channels, starting with the vertical pieces.
technique as for the top. When you're         very easily, so control the knife carefully     Working from the bottom up, center the
finished, the screen should be flat and       at all times. Repeat steps as needed to         cap over the base, then tap it into place
reasonably tight, with no sagging or          screen in the remaining openings.               using a rubber mallet. Tip: !fyou have a
wrinkling. If you make a mistake or the                                                       continuous horizontal band along the top
screen won't cooperate, simply remove                                                         of the screening, install those trim pieces
the spline and start over.                                                                    before capping the verticals.

232 • C OMPLETE G UlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Cut the cap pieces to length as you install them. Mark Install the horizontal pieces once the vertical cap pieces cutting lines with a pencil, and make the cuts with pruning are in place using the same techniques. Butt the horizontals shears or aviation snips. If desired, use a square to mark a tight against the verticals to start each piece, and then trim it straight cutting line across the face or backside of the trim to length as you approach the opposite end . cap (inset).

                                                                                              •   •   •

Complete the screening project by installing a screen Option: To protect the screening from being damaged by pets, door. A low-maintenance vinyl door provides a good match kids, or other causes, make lattice frames and install them in with the finish of the vinyl trim cap, but a traditional painted the framed areas. wood door is also appropriate. See pages 234 to 235 for door installation steps.

                                                                                                          Patio Rooms (7 Amenities •   233

I How to Install a Screen Door

Measure the door opening. The new screen door should be             To trim the height of a door, mark the cutting line, then
% to 3Jg " narrower and % to V/ shorter than the opening. Plan      clamp a straightedge to the door to guide your circular saw for
to trim the door, if necessary, for proper clearance. Some vinyl    a straight cut. For wood doors, score deeply along the cutting
doors should not be cut, while others may be cut only a limited     line with a utility knife before setting up the straightedge;
amount. If the door is vinyl, check with the manufacturer.          this prevents splintering on the top side when cutting across
                                                                    the grain.

TO trim the width of a wood door, it's usually best to              Test-fit the door in the opening using wood shims along
remove material from the hinge side, which is less visible. Mark    the bottom to raise the door to the right height. Center the
a full-length cutting line, and make the cut with a circular saw.   door from side to side; the reveal here should be about Vs" on
Or, you can use a power hand planer to trim off material from       each side.
the edge (shown in photo). Use sand paper or a file to round-
over the cut side (and bottom, if applicable) edges to match
the uncut edges and to prevent splinters.

234 • C OMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Install surface-mount hinges to the door using screws Hang the door. Set the door into the opening using shims at driven into pilot holes (three hinges is preferable, but two will the sides to establish equal reveals. Mark and drill pilot holes work for most doors). Position the top hinge about 7” from the for the hinges, then screw the hinges to the side jamb or post top of the door, the bottom hinge about 10” from the bottom, to hang the door. and the middle hinge halfway between the other two.

Install doorstop molding around the sides and top of the Add door handles. latches, and closer hardware as desired, door opening using galvanized finish nails if your screen door following the manufacturer’s instructions. A closer is a good is not prehung. Position the stops so the outer door face idea to prevent the door from being left open and admitting is flush with the outer jamb edges, trim, or door posts, as insects. Closers come in a range of types, including spring- applicable. Install the stop along the top of the opening first, loaded hinges, hydraulic pistons, and old-fashioned extension then along the sides. springs. Most also have a stop chain that prevents the door from blowing all the way open.

                                                                                                        Patio Rooms (7 Amenities •   235

IPatio Kitchen ith its perfect blend of indoor convenience area might be all you need to complete your dining W and alfresco atmosphere, it’s easy to see why accommodations. the outdoor kitchen is one of today’s most popular Made almost entirely of inexpensive masonry patio projects. In terms of design, outdoor kitchens materials, this kitchen is perfectly suited to the can take almost any form, but most are planned outdoors. Masonry is noncombustible, is not damaged around the essential elements of a built-in grill and by water, and can easily withstand decades of outdoor convenient countertop surfaces (preferably on both exposure. In fact, a little weathering makes masonry sides of the grill). Secure storage inside the cooking look even better. The kitchen’s structural cabinet is cabinet is another convenience many outdoor cooks built with concrete block, while the countertop is find indispensable. made of poured concrete and is cast in place over two The kitchen design in this project combines all layers of cementboard (for a total profile thickness of three of these elements in a moderately sized cooking 3”) . The block sides of the cabinet provide plenty of station that can fit a variety of patio configurations. support for the countertop, as well as a good surface The structure is freestanding and self-supporting, so for applying the stucco finish. You could also finish the it can be installed almost anywhere you can provide a cabinet with veneer stone or tile. stable foundation. In this project, the kitchen is built on top of an existing concrete patio slab. If you don’t have a suitable slab, you can pour a new concrete patio (see pages 89 to 99). Once your kitchen is Tools & Materials ~ built, adding a table and chairs or a casual sitting Chalk line Deck screws Pointed trowel (2 lj2 and 3”) Mortar mixing tools Stucco lath Level Silicone caulk (caulk Mason’s string gun) Circular saw with Release agent masonry blade Countertop concrete Mason’s chisel mIX Hand maul Base coat stucco Utility knife Finish coat stucco Straightedge Jigsaw with Square-notched remodeler’s blade trowel (optional) Metal snips Eye and ear Wood float protection Steel finishing Concrete colorant trowel (optional) Drill with masonry Hammer bit Abrasive brick, Concrete blocks diamond pad, or Mortar mix sandpaper Metal Food-safe concrete reinforcement sealer Steel angle lintels Work gloves This practical outdoor kitchen has just what the serious gri ller needs-a built-in grill and plenty of countertop space for W’ cementboard Cabinet doors and preparing and serving meals. At just over 8 ft. long and about Lumber (2 x 4 and hardware 3 ft. wide, the kitchen can fit almost anywhere on a standard 2 x 6) Hawk concrete patio.

236 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

I Construction Details The basic structure of l’— --- — ----- ---- ----- --- ----- — ----- — ---- -------- --- — --- --- ----- ---- ----- ---- ------ ------- --- --- ---- — ----- — 99~”--------------------~l this kitchen consists of five courses of standard 8” x 8” x 16” concrete block. Two mortared layers of 112” Concrete countertop poured over 2 layers cementboard serve as a 35” of ‘Iz” cementboard 32” base for the countertop. The 2”-thick poured concrete 8” x 8” x 16” concrete iJllI"" layer of the countertop extends 1112” beyond the rough block walls and covers j------------------------------------------------------------------------------- the cementboard edges. Door Double doors The walls receive a two-coat Plan view stucco finish, which can be Stucco (approx_ y, total thickness) tinted during the mixing or r painted after it cures. Doors 0 0 I Grill =l 3” in the front of the cabinet provide access to storage <ID (j[) <ID ([l space inside and to any utility f— 1” connections for the grill. overhang The kitchen’s dimensions 35” (beyo nd) can easily be adjusted to Door Door ~ ~ ~ stucc 0) accommodate a specific location, cooking equipment, or doors and additional amenities. / Front elevation Concrete slab (reinforced as required)

      Planning a Kitchen Project ~
      Whether you model your project after the one shown here                                             cabinet. To include a kitchen sink, you'll need a dedicated
      or create your own design, there are a few critical factors                                         water line and a drain connection (to the house system,
      to address as part of your initial planning:                                                        directly to the city sewer, or possibly to a dry well on
            Foundation: Check with your local building depart-                                            your property). Outdoor utilities are strictly governed by
      ment about foundation requirements for your kitchen.                                                building codes, so check with the building department for
      Depending on the kitchen's size and location, you may be                                            requirements. Generally, the rough-in work for utilities is
      allowed to build on top of a standard 4"-thick reinforced                                           best left to professionals.
      concrete patio slab, or you might need a foundation with
      frost footings or a "floating" or slab-on-grade foundation .
            Grill & door units: You'll need the exact dimensions
      of the grill, doors, and any other built-in features before
      you draw up your plans and start building. When shopping
      for equipment, keep in mind its utility requirements and
      the type of support system needed for the grill and other
      large units. Some grills are drop-in and are supported only
      by the countertop; others must be supported below with a
      non-combustible, load-bearing material such as concrete
      block or a poured concrete platform.
            utility hookups: Grills fueled by natural gas require
                                                                                                          Kitchen grills may be supplied by a natural gas line
      a plumbed gas line, and those with electric starters need                                           connected to the house supply or by a refillable propane
      an outdoor electrical circuit, both running into the kitchen                                        tank stored inside the kitchen's cabinet area.

                                                                                                                                                                      Patio Rooms (7 A menities •   237

I How to Build a Patio Kitchen
                                                                      2

Prepare the patio slab or foundation by cleaning the                Dry-lay the first course of block along the chalk lines to
surface thoroughly to remove all dirt. oil, paint. or sealer that   test the layout. If desired, use 2"- or 4"-thick solid blocks under
could prevent a good bond with the mortar. Snap chalk lines         the door openings. Adjust the layout lines as needed, and mark
representing the outer edges of the block walls.                    the exact locations of the door openings.

                                                                      4

Set the first course of block into a mortar bed,                    Continue laying up the wall. adding reinforcing wire or
compressing the mortar to 3fs". Lay the second course of            rebar if required by local building codes. Instead of tooling the
block, following a running bond (1 over 2) pattern. Cut blocks      mortar joints for a concave profile, use a trowel to slice excess
as needed for the openings by scoring the cutting lines with        mortar from the blocks. This creates a flat surface that's easier
a circular saw and masonry blade and splitting the block            to cover with stucco.
with a mason's chisel.

238 • C OMPLETE G UlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Install steel angle lintels to span over the door openings. If an opening is in line with a course of block, mortar the lintels in place on top of the block. otherwise, use a circular saw with a masonry blade to cut channels for the horizontal leg of the angle. Lintels should span 6” beyond each side of an opening. Slip the lintel into the channels, and then fill the block cells containing the lintel with mortar to secure the lintel in place. Lay a bed of mortar on top of the lintels, then set block into the mortar. Complete the final course of block in the cabinet and let the mortar cure.

6 7

Cut two 8-ft.-long sheets of cementboard to match Cut pieces to fit for a second layer of cementboard. Apply the outer dimensions of the block cabinet. Apply mortar a bed of mortar to the top of the first panel, and then lay the to the tops of the cabinet blocks and then set one layer of second layer pieces on top, pressing them into the mortar so cementboard into the mortar. If you will be installing a built-in the surfaces are level. Let the mortar cure. grill or other accessories, make cutouts in the cementboard with a utility knife or a jigsaw with a remodeler’s blade.

                                                                                                                         (continued)

                                                                                                           Patio Rooms (7 Amenities •   239

To create a 1%" overhang for the countertop. build a                Cut vertical 2 x 4 supports to fit snugly between the
perimeter band of 2 x 4 lumber; this will serve as the base         foundation and the bottom of the 2 x 4 band. Install a support
of the concrete form. Cut the pieces to fit tightly around the      at the ends of each wall and evenly spaced in between. Secure
cabinet along the top. Fasten the pieces together at their ends     each support with angled screws driven into the band boards.
with 3" screws so their top edges are flush with the bottom of
the cementboard.

Build the sides of the countertop form        Form the opening for the grill using 2 x 6 side pieces (no overhang inside
with 2 x 6s cut to fit around the 2 x 4       opening). Support the edges of the cementboard along the grill cutout with cleats
band. Position the 2 x 6s so their top        attached to the 2 x 6s. Add ve rtical supports as needed under the cutout to keep the
edges are 2" above the cementboard,           form from shifting under the we ight of the concrete.
and fasten them to the band with 2'12"
screws.

240 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

12

Cut a sheet of stucco lath to fit into the countertop form, leaving a 2” space along Dampen the cementboard with a the inside perimeter of the form. Remove the lath and set it aside. Seal the form joints mist of water. Mix a batch of countertop with a fine bead of silicone caulk and smooth with a finger. After the caulk dries, coat concrete mix, adding colorant to the mix the form boards (not the cementboard) with vegetable oil or another release agent. if desired. Working quickly, fill along the edges of the form with concrete, carefully packing it down into the overhang portion by hand.

14 ~ 5 —

                                                                                                                                  --
                                                                                       ,                                      •

Fill the rest of the form halfway up with an even layer of Tap along the outsides of the form with a hammer to concrete. Lay the stucco lath on top, then press it lightly into remove air bubbles trapped against the inside edges. Screed the concrete with a float. Add the remaining concrete so it’s the top of the concrete with a straight 2 x 4 riding along the flush with the tops of the 2 x 6s. form sides. Add concrete as needed to fill in low spots so the surface is perfectly flat.

                                                                                                                            (continued)

                                                                                                            Patio Room s (7 A menities •   241

                                                                                           18



 -
          I

After the bleed water disappears.            A few hours after floating. finish          Moist-cure the countertop with a fine
float the concrete with a wood or            the countertop as desired. A few passes     water mist for three to five days. Remove
magnesium float. The floated surface         with a steel finishing trowel yields the    the form boards. If desired, smooth the
should be flat and smooth but will still     smoothest surface. Hold the leading edge    countertop edges with an abrasive brick
have a somewhat rough texture. Be            of the trowel up and work in circular       and/or a diamond pad or sandpaper.
careful not to overfloat and draw water      strokes. Let the concrete set for a while   After the concrete cures, apply a food-
to the surface.                              between passes.                             safe sealer to help prevent staining.

  1

Prepare for door installation in the cabinet. Outdoor cabinet doors are usually          Finish installing and hanging the
made of stainless steel, and are typically installed by hanging hinges or flanges with   doors. Test the door operations and
masonry anchors. Drill holes for masonry anchors in the concrete block, following the    make sure to caulk around the edges
door manufacturer's instructions.                                                        with high-quality silicone caulk. Note:
                                                                                         Doors shown here are best installed
                                                                                         before the stucco finish is applied to the
                                                                                         cabinet. Other doors may be easier to
                                                                                         install following a different sequence.

242 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

21

Begin finishing the cabinet walls by dampening the concrete block and applying a 3js” -thick base coat of stucco, following the manufacturer’s directions. Apply an even layer over the wa ll, and then smooth the surface with a wood float. Moist-cure the stucco for 48 hours or as directed by the manufacturer.

22

Apply a finish coat of tinted stucco that’s at least Va” thick. Set the grill into place, make the gas connection, then Even ly saturate the base coat stucco surface with water prior to check it carefully for leaks. Permanently install the grill applying the finish coat. Texture the surface as desired. Moist- following the manufacturer’s directions. The joints around grills cure the stucco for several days as directed. are highly susceptible to water intrusion; seal them thoroughly with an approved caulk to help keep moisture out of the cabinet space below.

                                                                                                        Patio Rooms (7 Amenities •   243

ILow-voltage Patio Lighting

T   hanks to the many inexpensive and easy-to-install
    lighting kits and fixtures available, outdoor lighting
has become a standard feature in today's home
                                                                         spaces a second life with a completely different feel
                                                                         from the daytime setting.
                                                                              Standard low-voltage lighting systems are
landscapes. A good lighting plan not only makes your                     commonly available in complete kits that include a
patio and walkways more useful at night, it gives these                  low-voltage transformer, low-voltage cable, and several
                                                                         light fixtures, each with a wire lead that links to the
                                                                         main cable with a special connector. A basic landscape
                                                                         kit typically has three or more fixtures for standard
                                                                         in-ground installation. If you'd like to add specialty
                                                                         patio fixtures, such as step (or "brick") lights, pole-
                                                                         and wall-mount fixtures, and task lights for outdoor
                                                                         cooking, make sure your system is compatible with a
                                                                         full range of accessory lights. In addition to standard
                                                                         wired systems, you can find a wide variety of solar-
                                                                         powered fixtures that offer free operation and the
                                                                         easiest possible installation.
                                                                              Here are some other factors to consider when
                                                                         choosing a standard low-voltage lighting system:

                                                                         •   Transformer power-For best performance, the
                                                                             total wattage of the light fixtures should be at least
                                                                             one-third of the transformer's wattage rating but
                                                                             should not exceed the wattage rating. If necessary,
                                                                             use two systems to avoid overloading a single
                                                                             system with too many fixtures.
                                                                         •   Transformer controls-Consider timers and
                                                                             photosensitive switches for automatic operation.
                                                                         •   Cable gauge size-12-amp UF cable is
                                                                             recommended to reduce voltage drop, resulting
                                                                             in dimmer lights at the far end of the line. Long
                                                                             cable runs may require 8- or 10-gauge wire to
                                                                             prevent voltage drop.
                                                                         •   Fixture and bulb brightness-Brightness
                                                                             is often rated in foot-candles: one foot-candle
                                                                             is equivalent to the brightness of a 12" square
                                                                             area lighted by a candle held 12" away. Use the
                                                                             brightness rating to guide the fixture layout.

                                                                             Tools & Materials ~
                                                                             Drill and bits             Paint stir-stick
                                                                             Screwdrivers               PVC pipe
                                                                             Trenching spade            Hammer
AS with indoor light fixtures, landscape lights can be just
as beautiful as they are illuminating. Consider the look (and                Low-voltage lighting       Work gloves
visibility) of fixtures in the daylight, in addition to their lighting         kit
characteristics at night.

244 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Effective Lighting ~ Here are some general design guidelines to keep in mind decorative and made to be visible; others are easy to when planning your lighting scheme: hide under low plantings or tuck away in the shadows. Keep it subtle. With the exception of surprise- Illuminate appropriately: Patios call for oriented security lights (floodlights, motion detectors), atmospheric lighting for nighttime use-so party guests outdoor lighting should be mellow and subdued-an can see one another (at least in dim light) and diners can intermingling of soft light and shadows, not a battle see their food during evening meals. Provide a soft wash against the darkness. of background light with sconces mounted to the house Mix it up. The best lighting plans employ a wall or with post-fixtures with globes. For entertaining, a combination of fixtures and levels of illumination. sprinkling of small accent lights along the patio’s borders Use brighter or more direct lights to highlight a few can create enough light for socializing while maintaining landscape features or patio areas. Otherwise, stick to subtle ambiance. low, unobtrusive lighting. Variation helps emphasize Consider safety: Main traffic routes on and off key elements. a patio need lighting for safe and convenient travel. Illuminate surfaces, not people. Orient fixtures On patios, include lights at all changes in floor height downward to light up paths and patio surfaces or upward and on any obstructions not clearly visible at night. for indirect background lighting. As a general rule, naked Recessed lights on step risers provide a small amount bulbs should be hidden from view. Never direct beams of of light precisely where it’s needed. Paths are best light into a viewer’s line of sight, which creates a harsh lighted with low-voltage pole fixtures; space fixtures 8 glare at night. to 10 ft. apart for localized pools of light, or put them Use the right fixture for the job. There’s an closer together to overlap their washes of light in a outdoor light for virtually every application. Some are “spread” pattern.

Typical low-voltage outdoor lighting systems consist of: lens cap (A), lens cap posts (B), upper reflector (C), lens (D), base/stake/cable connector assembly (contains lower reflector) (E), low-voltage cable (F), lens hood (G), 7-watt 12-volt bulbs (H), cable connector caps (I), control box containing transformer and timer (J), and light sensor (K).

                                                                                                  Patio Room s (7 A menities •   245

I How to Install LOW-voltage Patio Lighting

Determine where you will install the transformer(s)-             Drill a hole through the wall or rim joist for the low-voltage
either in the garage, on an exterior house wall, or on an        cable and any sensors to pass through (inset). If a circuit
outdoor post buried in the ground with concrete. If installing   begins in a high-traffic area, it's a good idea to protect the
the transformer in the garage, mount it on a wall within 24"     cable by running it through a short piece of PVC pipe or
of a GFCI receptacle and at least 12" above the floor. See       conduit and then into the shallow trench (see step 9).
variation (below) for alternative installations.

     Planning Tip ~
     Make a diagram of your yard and mark the location
     of new fixtures. Note the wattages of the fixtures
     and use the diagram to select a transformer and
     plan the circuits .


                        • • • •                        •
                    •                                  •

                                                                 Variation: To install the transformer(s) to an outdoor wall or
                                                                 post, mount the unit within 24" of an outdoor GFCI receptacle
                                                                 and at least 12" above the ground. If the receptacle is exposed,
                                                       t         install an "in-use" receptacle cover for added protection from
                                                                 the elements. Do not use an extension cord to connect the
                                                                 transformer.

246 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Attach the end of the low-voltage wire to the terminals Transformers usually have a simple mechanism that on the transformer. Make sure that both strands of wire are allows you to set times for the lights to come on and go off held tightly by their terminal screws. automatically. Set these times before hanging the transformer.

Many low-voltage light fixtures are modular, consisting Take apart the connector box and insert the ends of of a spiked base, a riser tube and a lamp. On these units, feed the fixture wire and the low voltage landscape cable into the wires and the wire connector from the light section down it. Puncture the wire ends with the connector box leads. through the riser tube and into the base. Reassemble the connector box.

                                                                                                                    (continued)

                                                                                                     Patio Rooms &- Amenities •   247

    7                                                             8

Feed the wire connector back into the light base and attach     After the bulb is installed. assemble the fixture parts that
it according to directions that came with the lamp. In this     cover it, including the lens cap and reflector.
model, all that was required was pushing the connector into a
locking slot in the base.

Layout the lights, with the wires attached, in the pattern      Gently force the cable into the slot formed by the spade;
you have chosen. Then cut the sod between fixtures with a       don't tear the wire insulation. A paint stick (or a cedar shingle)
spade. Push the blade about 5" deep and pry open a seam by      is a good tool for this job. Push the wire to the bottom of
rocking the blade back and forth.                               the slot.

248 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Once the lamp is stabilized, tuck any extra wire into the slot Firmly push the light into the slot in the sod . It the lamp using the paint stick. If you have a lot of extra wire, you can fold it doesn’t seat properly, pull it out and cut another slot at a right and push the excess to the bottom of the slot. No part of the wire angle to the first and try again. should be exposed when you are done with the job.

 Choosing Solar Landscape Lights ~
 Outdoor solar-powered lighting offers two distinct
 advantages over conventional low-voltage systems: easy,
 flexible installation and free power. Installing most landscape
 and patio light fixtures is as simple as staking the light into
 the ground or mounting it to a wall or post. Many fixtures,
 including path and accent lights, have a built-in solar panel,
 so the fixture can go anywhere it will be exposed to direct
 sunlight during the day. Brighter fixtures, like spot and
 security lights, often include a separate solar panel with
 a thin wire that delivers power to the light. The panel is
 mounted and positioned for maximum sun exposure, while
 the light fixture can be placed directly where it's needed.
 Most solar fixtures come with a photosensitive switch that
 automatically turns the light on at dusk and off at sunrise.
       The main disadvantage of solar lighting is reliability.
 Lower quality fixtures and some high-power lights (such
 as spot lights) offer running times that won't last through
                                                                      Solar landscape lights are available in sets and
 the night. To minimize this problem, choose high-quality
                                                                      individual fixtures. You can pick and choose fixtures based
 fixtures with advanced solar cells (better cells collect             on lighting needs as well as the fixtures' appearance and
 more power in low-light weather than cheaper cells) and              brightness. Best of all, you can easily reposition lights for
 efficient LED bulbs.                                                 desired effects throughout the seasons.

                                                                                                                Patio (7 Walkw ay Basics •   249

I Conversion Charts Metric Equivalent Inches (in.) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 36 39.4 Feet (ft.) Yards (yd.) 11;11 Millimeters (mm) 0.400.791 1.593.186.359.5310 12.7 15.9 19.122.225.450.876.2101.6127 152 178 203 229 254 279 305 914 1,000 Centimeters (em) 0.951 1.271.591.912.22 2.54 5.08 7.6210.1612.7 15.2 17.8 20.3 22.9 25.4 27.9 30.5 91.4 100 Meters (m) .30 .91 1.00

Converting Measurements
To Convert:                To:                         Multiply by:                  To Convert:              To:                       Multiply by:
Inches                     Millimeters                 25.4                          Millimeters              Inches                    0.039
Inches                     Centimeters                 2.54                          Centimeters              Inches                    0.394
Feet                       Meters                      0.305                         Meters                   Feet                      3.28
Yards                      Meters                      0.914                         Meters                   Yards                     1.09
Miles                      Kilometers                  1.609                         Kilometers               Miles                     0.621
Square inches              Square centimeters          6.45                          Square centimeters       Square inches             0.155
Sguare feet                S uare meters               0.093                         S uare meters            S uare feet               10.8
Square yards               Square meters               0.836                         Square meters            Square yards              1.2
Cubic inches               Cubic centimeters           16.4                          Cubic centimeters        Cubic inches              0.061
Cubic feet                 Cubic meters                0.0283                        Cubic meters             Cubic feet                35.3
Cubic yards                Cubic meters                0.7 65                        Cubic meters             Cubic yards               1.31
Pints (U.S.)               Liters                      0.473 (Imp. 0.568)            Liters                   Pints (U.s.)              2.114 (Imp. 1.76)
Quarts (U.S.)              Liters                      0.946 (Imp. 1.136)            Liters                   Quarts (U.S.)             1.057 (Imp. 0.88)
Gallons (U.s.)             Liters                      3.785 (Imp. 4.546)            Liters                   Gallons (U.S.)            0.264 (Imp. 0.22)
Ounces                     Grams                       28.4                          Grams                    Ounces                    0.035
Pounds                     Kilograms                   0.454                         Kilograms                Pounds                    2.2
Tons                       Metric tons                 0.907                         Metric tons              Tons                      1.1

Converting Temperatures                                                              Fahrenheit                                                 Celsius
Convert degrees Fahrenheit (F) to degrees Celsius (() by folloWing this simple
formula: Subtract 32 from the Fahrenheit temperature reading. Then mulitply that
number by %. For example, 77°F- 32 = 45. 45 x %= 25°C.                               55°                                                                     25°
To convert degrees Celsius to degrees Fahrenheit, multiply the Celsius temperature   50°                                                                     20°
reading by %, then add 32. For example, 25 °C x %= 45. 45 + 32 = 77 °F.              45°                                                                     15°
                                                                                     40°                                                                     10°
                                                                                     35°                                                                      5°
                                                                                     30°                            Freezing                                  0°
                                                                                     25°                                                                     _5 °
                                                                                     20°                                                                    -10°
                                                                                     15°                                                                    -15°
                                                                                     10°                                                                    -20°
                                                                                      5°                                                                    -25°
                                                                                      0°                                                                    -30°

250 • COMPLETE GUlDE TO PATIOS & WALKWAYS

Drill Bit Guide Twist Carbide-tipped Glass Spade Adjustable Hole Bit Masonry & Tile Bit Counterbore Saw

Nails Nail lengths are identified by numbers from 4 to 60 followed by the leiter “d,” which stands for “penny.” For general framing and repair work, use common or box nails. Common nails are best suited to framing work where strength is important. Box nails are smaller in diameter than common nails, which makes them easier to drive and less likely to split wood. Use box nails for light work and thin materials. Most (ommon and box nails have a (ement or vinyl (oating that improves their holding power.

                                                                                                                       lbs_                             mm                            in_

r
E 20d 102 mm 4”

-< ~ 16d 89 mm 3Yz” ~ f: 1Od 76 mm 3” K 8d 64 mm 2W’ ~ K E> 6d 51 mm 2” K ~> 5d 44 mm 1%” ~ ~ > 4d 38 mm 1Yz” ‘I

Counterbore, Shank & Pilot Hole Diameters Screw Counterbore Diameter for Clearance Hole for Pilot Hole Diameter Size Screw Head (in inches) Screw Shank (in inches) Hard Wood (in inches) Soft Wood (in inches) #1 %4 %4 %4 1/32 #2 1/4 %2 %4 1/32 #3 1/4 %4 VI6 %4 #4 1/4 1/8 VI6 %4 #5 1/4 1/8 5/64 VI6 #6 Sfl6 %4 %2 %4 #7 5/16 5/32 3/32 %4 #8 % 11/64 1/8 3132 #9 % 11/64 1/8 3132 #10 % 3116 1/8 %4 #11 1/2 3116 5/32 %4 #12 1/2 7/32 %4 1/8

                                                                                                                                                                    Conve rsion C harts •       251

I Resources Belgard North American One-Call Referral System p. 11 Pavers and retaining walls 8882580808 877 235 4273 www.belgard.biz Underdeck p. 196 Inter-joist ceiling system Borgert Products, Inc. 877 8057156 p. 63 (top) Concrete pavers and walls www.underdeck.com 8006224952 www.borgertproducts.com ScreenTight p. 228 Porch screening Crossville Porcelain Tile 8007687325 p. 19 www.screentight.com 931 4842110 www.crossvilleinc.com Palram Americas p. 206 Sunturf corrugated polycarbonate building panels and EzydeckTM Palsun flat extruded polycarbonate sheeting p. 120 (product also shown on page 121) modular decking 8009999459 system www.palramamericas.com 8003436394 www.ezydeck.com / www.floorings.com Red wing Shoes Co. work shoes and boots shown throughout book Municipal Code Corporation 8007339464 Online library database available to public of city/county www.redwingshoes.com ordinances www.municode.com

Photography Credits
Belgard / www.belgard .biz                                   Shelley Metcalf
p. 11                                                        p. 4, 6-7, 9 (lower), 10, 15, 25,38, 114, 194-195 (114 and
                                                             195 William Bocken Architecture & Interior Design, Paul
Borgert                                                      Adams Landscape Design
p. 63 (top)
                                                             Jerry Pavia
Crossville Porcelain Tile                                    p. 17, 18 (right), 74,130 (top), 138-139, 140 (two lower), 166,
p. 19                                                           175 (lower two), 186, 188 (top two)

Distinctive Designs                                          Photolibrary / Garden Picture Library /
p. 197 (lower)                                                  www.photolibrary.com
                                                             p. 8 © Clive Nichols, 9 (top) © Ed Badham, 12 © Allan Pollok-
EzydeckTM modular decking system / www.ezydeck.com /            Morris, 16 © Ron Sutherland, 21 (top) Photolibrary/GPL, 24
   www.floorings.com                                            © Jennifer Cheung/ Botanica/GPL, 140 (top) © Allan Pollok-
p. 3 (right column, second from top), 120 (product also         Morris, 163 Garden Picture Library, 192 Photolibrary
   shown on page 121)
                                                             Versa-LOK® Retaining Wall Systems /
John Deere                                                     www.versa-Iok.com
p. 164 (lower)                                               p.13,22

Tony Giammarino / www.tonygiammarino.com                     Jessie Walker
p. 38-39, 63 (lower right), 75 (lower), 80                   p. 14

iStock Photography / www.istockphoto.com
p. 88 (two lower images), 172, 188 (lower two), 198 (lower
   left and right), 249

252 • C OMPLETE GU lD E TO PATI OS & WALKWAYS

I Index A building circular patios with step-by-step, 222-225 Acid staining poured concrete, 21, 96-97 about, 64-65 attached to house Aerial views making curves, 62 about, 206-209 for casual settings, 36 step-by-step, 66-69 construction graphic, 207, 208 drawing own, 32 building patios with step-by-step building, 210-219 for large areas, 35 about, 56-57 ideas, 15 for open suburban settings, 37 construction graphic, 58 patio kitchens for privacy and small lots, 33 paver types and patterns, 63 about, 236-237 for sloping areas, 34 step-by-step, 59-62 construction graphic, 237 Arbors using mortared method planning, 237 building about, 70 step-by-step building, 238-243 about, 220 step-by-step, 71-73 screened patio rooms adding trellis, 226-227 idea for, 17 about, 228-229 basic, 221 Concrete & timber garden steps, installing screen door, 234-235 step-by-step, 222-225 building, 178, 181-185 step-by-step building, 230-233 idea for, 15 Control joints Entertaining about, 98 building patio kitchens for B cutting, 108 about, 236-237 Basketweave pattern, 63,137 Crushed stone, about, 22-23 construction graphic, 237 Bleed water and concrete, 90 planning, 237 Boardwalks, building, 192-193 D step-by-step, 238-243 Brick Decomposed granite (DG), about, 22, 23 design considerations, 8 about, 16 Decorative concrete walkways, installing ideas for, 8-9,13 cutting, 135 about, 156 Excavation and surface preparation for patios step-by-step, 157-159 patios, 40-45 building with pavers, using Detached patios Expansive patios mortared method ideas for, 11, 12 idea for, 11 about, 70 plan for, 35 plan for, 35 step-by-step, 71-73 Dining building with pavers, using building patio kitchens for F sandset method about, 236-237 Fire pits about, 132 construction graphic, 237 building loose materials patios with, step-by-step, 133-136 planning, 237 116-119 edging, about & installing, 126 step-by-step, 238-243 idea for, 13 ideas for, 16, 25 design considerations, 8 Flagstone patterns for, 63, 137 ideas for, 8-9, 13 about, 18 walkways Drainage building garden steps, 186-190 edging, about & installing, 163 building runoff gutters for under-deck building patios idea for, 16 patios, 203-205 mortared method installing using mortared method installing dry wells for house systems, about, 84 over concrete 49-50 step-by-step, 85-87 about, 160 permeable paving and, 25 sandset method step-by-step, 161-163 planning for proper, 29 about, 74-75 installing using sandset method swales construction graphic, 76 about, 144 building, 46-47 step-by-step, 77-79 step-by-step, 145-149 options for, 48 buying, 19 Building codes, 28 Dry stone walls cutting, 82-83 about, 75, 80 installing walkways, 164-165 C building, 81 45° herringbone pattern, 137 Cedar decking walkway, building, cutting stone for, 82-83 Freestanding patios, ideas for, 11, 12 192-193 Dry wells, 49-50 Front patios Cedar timber patio edging, about idea for, 14 & installing. 130 E plan for, 37 Climate control, 30-31 Edging Furniture clearance allowances, 27 Cobblestones for patios, about & installing, 124 described, 57 brick paver, 62, 125-126 G See a/so Concrete (cobblestone) concrete curb, 128-129 Garden steps pavers landscape timber, 130 building Coloring poured concrete, 21, 96-97,158 lumber, 131 flagstone, 186-190 Concrete rigid paver, 125 timber & concrete, 178, 181-185 bleed water and, 90 stone, 127 timber & gravel, 176-180 estimating coverage amounts, 89, 98 for walkways, about & installing brick, planning, 143 working with, 98-99 148-149,163 Gravel See a/so Poured concrete Enclosures for patios building steps of timber and, 176-180 Concrete blocks, building retaining walls arbors, building installing walkways with interlocking, 52-55 about, 220 about, 166-167 Concrete (cobblestone) pavers adding trellis, 226-227 step-by-step, 168-171 about, 17 basic, 221 types of, 48

                                                                                                                         Index •   253

Green materials                            Paths, installing                                 step-by-step, 77-79
  solar-powered lighting, 249                brick, mortared over concrete               layout & surface preparation, 40-45
  using, 25                                      about, 160                              with loose materials, 114-115
Gutters for under-deck patios, building,         step-by-step, 161-163                   with loose materials and having fire
  203-205                                    brick, using sandset method                     pit, 116-119
                                                 about, 144                              with pavers, using mortared method
H                                                step-by-step, 145-149                       about, 70
Herringbone patterns, 137                    concrete, decorative                            step-by-step, 71-73
                                                 about, 156                              seeded concrete & wood
I                                                step-by-step, 157-159                       about, 100-101
Interlocking concrete blocks, building       concrete, poured                                step-by-step, 102-105
   retaining walls with, 52-55                   about, 150                              tiling on top of concrete slab
Isolation joints, about, 98                      sloping & reinforcing, 151                  rubber, 122-123
                                                 step-by-step, 152-155                       stone
K                                            flagstone, 164-165                                   about, 106-107
Kitchens, building outdoor                   gravel                                                cutting control joints, 108
   about, 236-237                                about, 166-167                                   step-by-step, 109-113
   construction graphic, 237                     step-by-step, 168-171                            surface evaluation, 108
   planning, 237                             pebbled stepping stone, 172-175                 wood,120-121
   step-by-step, 238-243                   Patio design considerations                   under-deck
                                             for entertaining & dining, 8-9                  about, 196
L                                            expansive patios, 11                            design considerations, 197, 202
Landscape timber patio edging, about &       function and, 5                                 runoff gutters for, 203-205
   installing, 130                           for privacy, 10                                 step-by-step, 198-202
Lighting                                     remote patios, 12                        Pavers
   for entertaining & dining, 8            Patio edging, about & installing, 124         about concrete, 16-17
   installing low-voltage                    brick paver, 126                            as base for gravel paths, 167
      about, 244                             concrete curb, 128-129                      building circular patios with
      step-by-step, 247-249                  landscape timber, 130                           about, 64-65
   patio shelters and, 15                    lumber, 131                                     making curves, 62
   planning considerations, 244-245, 246     rigid paver, 125                                step-by-step, 66-69
Loose materials                              stone, 127                                  building patios
   about, 22-23, 48                        Patio rooms                                       with brick, using sandset method
   building patios with, 114-115             about, 195                                           about, 132
   building patios with fire pit with,       building kitchens                                    step-by-step, 133-136
      116-119                                    about, 236-237                              with concrete (cobblestone)
   building steps of timber and, 176-180         construction graphic, 237                        about, 56-57
   idea for using. 22                            planning, 237                                     construction graphic, 58
   installing walkways                           step-by-step, 238-243                             paver types and patterns, 63
      about, 166-167                         building screened                                    step-by-step, 59-62
      step-by-step, 168-171                      about, 228-229                          with concrete (cobblestone), using
Lumber patio edging, about &                     installing screen door, 234-235             mortared method
   installing, 131                               step-by-step, 230-233                       about, 70
                                           Patios, building                                  step-by-step, 71-73
M                                            with brick pavers, using sandset            cutting, 135
Main entrance patios                               method                                edging for patios, about & installing,
  idea for, 14                                   about, 132                                  62,125-126
  plan for, 37                                   patterns for, 63,137                    edging for walkways
Multipurpose patio idea, 13                      step-by-step, 133-136                       about & installing timber for, 130-131
MX brick, 16                                 circular                                        b~ck, 148-149, 163
                                                 concrete, 91-95                         patterns, 63,137
N                                                with concrete (cobblestone) pavers      rubber for patios on top of concrete,
90° herringbone pattern, 137                          about, 64-65                           122-123
NX brick, 16                                          making curves, 62                  types of, 16-17
                                                      step-by-step, 66-69                walkways, installing brick using
o                                            with concrete (cobblestone) pavers                sandset method
Open patio designs                                    about, 56-57                           about, 144
  idea for, 11                                        construction graphic, 58               step-by-step, 145-149
  plan for, 35                                        paver types and patterns, 63    Pea gravel, about, 22-23
                                                      step-by-step, 59-62             Pebbled stepping stone walkways,
p                                            concrete slab                               installing, 172-175
Paths                                            about, 88-90                         Pergolas
  brick edging, about & installing,              acid staining, 96-97                    idea for, 15
      148-149,163                                circular, 91-95                         See a/so Arbors
  building boardwalks, 192-193                   construction graphic, 90             Permeable paving and drainage, 25
  designing, 140                                 next to house, 92                    Pinwheel pattern, 137
  functions of, 5,139                        with flagstone, using mortared method    Planning considerations
  ideas for, 140                                 about, 84                               basic, 26-28
      poured concrete, 20, 21                    step-by-step, 85-87                     climate control and, 30-31
      stone, 18                              with flagstone, using sandset method        drainage and, 25, 29
  laying out, 141-142                            about, 74-75                            for lighting, 244-245, 246
  width of, 8                                    construction graphic, 76                overview of, 7
                                                                                         for steps, 143

254 • COMPLET E GU lD E T O PATI OS & WALKWAYS

Plans Small lots ideas for, 140 for casual settings, 36 idea for, 10 poured concrete, 20, 21 drawing own, 32 plan for, 33 stone, 18 for large areas, 35 Soil for patios, 79 laying out, 141-142 for open suburban settings, 37 Solar-powered lighting, 249 width of, 8 for privacy and small lots, 33 Square, checking for, 43 Walkways, installing for sloping areas, 34 Stepping stone paths brick, mortared over concrete Plants for patios, 79 idea for, 140 about, 160 Porcelain tile, 24 installing pebbled, 172-175 step-by-step, 161-163 Posts, cladding, 229 Steps brick, using sandset method Poured concrete building about, 144 building timber & concrete garden flagstone, 186-190 step-by-step, 145-149 steps, 178, 181-185 timber & concrete, 178, 181-185 concrete, decorative installing walkways timber & gravel, 176-180 about, 156 about, 150 planning, 143 step-by-step, 157-159 sloping & reinforcing, 151 Stone concrete, poured step-by-step, 152-155 about, 18-19 about, 150 patio edging, about & installing, buying, 19 sloping & reinforcing, 151 128-129 crushed, 22-23 step-by-step, 152-155 tinting, 21, 96-97, 158 cutting, 82-83 flagstone, 164-165 Poured concrete patios ideas for, 18, 19 gravel about, 20 patio edging, about & installing, 127 about, 166-167 building tile, 19 step-by-step, 168-171 about, 88-90 trimming, 127 pebbled stepping stone, 172-175 circular step-by-step, 91-95 Swales Walls coloring, 21, 96-97,158 building, 46-47 dry stone construction graphic, 90 options for, 48 about, 75, 80 next to house, 92 SX/SW brick, 16 building, 81 seeded concrete & wood cutting stone for, 82-83 about, 100-101 T retaining step-by-step, 102-105 Terra-cotta tile, 24 about, 51 decorative touches for, 21 Tile building with interlocking ideas for, 20, 21 about, 24 concrete blocks, 52-55 Poured concrete walkways cutting curves in, 111 Water drainage about, 20 idea for, 24 building runoff gutters for under-deck ideas for, 20, 21 porcelain, 24 patios, 203-205 Pressure-treated lumber quarry, 24 dry wells for house systems, 49-50 for boardwalks, 192 saltillo, 24 permeable paving and, 25 for concrete & wood patio, 100 stone, 19 planning for proper, 29 for flagstone walkways, 164 on top of concrete slab, building swales for landscape timber edging, 130 rubber, 122-123 building, 46-47 for screening systems, 230 stone options for, 48 Privacy about, 106-107 Water features and privacy, 10 idea for, 10 cutting control joints, 108 Welcoming patios plan for, 33 step-by-step, 109-113 idea for, 14 surface evaluation, 108 plan for, 37 Q wood,120-121 Wood chips, about, 22, 23 Quarry tile, 24 Timber & concrete garden steps, Wood tile patios, building in top of building, 178, 181-185 concrete, 120-121 R Timber & gravel garden steps, building, Remote patios, ideas for, 11, 12 176-180 Z Retaining walls Tinting poured concrete, 21,96-97, 158 Zoning laws, 28 about, 51 Trellises, adding to arbors, 226-227 building with interlocking concrete Types 2 & 3 pavers, 16 blocks, 52-55 Rigid paver patio edging, about & U installing, 125 Under-deck patios, building Rubber tile patios, building on top of about, 196 concrete, 122-123 design considerations, 197, 202 Running-bond pattern, 63 runoff gutters for, 203-205 Runoff gutters for under-deck patios, step-by-step, 198-202 building, 203-205 Urban patios idea for, 10 S plan for, 33 Saltillo tile, 24 Utilities, 28, 237 Screened patio rooms, building about, 228-229 W installing screen door, 234-235 Walkways step-by-step, 230-233 brick edging, about & installing, Shelters for patios, ideas for, 15 148-149,163 Slopes building boardwalks, 192-193 drainage swales and, 46-48 designing, 140 retaining walls and, 51 functions of. 5, 139

                                                                                                                  Tne/ex •   255

                     CREATIVE PUBLISHING international
                     Complete Guide to A Green Home
                     Complete Guide to Attics & Basements
                     Complete Guide to Basic Woodworking
                     Complete Guide Build Your Kids a Treehouse
                     Complete Guide to Contemporary Sheds
                     Complete Guide to Creative Landscapes
                     Complete Guide to Custom Shelves & Built-Ins
                     Complete Guide to Decorating with Ceramic Tile
                     Complete Guide to Decks
                     Complete Guide to DIY Projects for Luxurious Living
                     Complete Guide to Dream Bathrooms
                                                                           ISBN 1-58923-285-2
                     Complete Guide to Dream Kitchens
                     Complete Guide to Finishing Walls & Ceilings
                     Complete Guide to Floor Decor
                     Complete Guide to Gazebos & Arbors
                     Complete Guide to Home Carpentry
                     Complete Guide to Landscape Construction
                     Complete Guide Maintain Your Pool & Spa
                     Complete Guide to Masonry & Stonework
                     Complete Guide to Outdoor Wood Projects
                                                                           ISBN 1-58923-483-9
                     Complete Guide to Painting & Decorating
                     Complete Guide to Patios
                     Complete Guide to Plumbing
                     Complete Guide to Roofing & Siding
                     Complete Guide to Trim & Finish Carpentry
                     Complete Guide to Windows & Entryways
                     Complete Guide to Wiring
                     Complete Guide to Wood Storage Projects
                     Complete Guide to Yard & Garden Features
                     Complete Outdoor Builder
                     Complete Photo Guide to I-lome Repair

        •            Complete Photo Guide to Home Improvement              ISBN 1-58923-412-X

     J

QeatIve PImIlshlng International Complete Photo Guide to Homeowner Basics

                 I

                 ') 400 First Avenue North • Suite 300 • Minneapolis, MN 55401 • www.creatlvepub.com

Rather have me do it?

Building a deck is a big job. I make it look easy.